The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutTABLE OF CONTENTS - SNEE 1149 Snee 1149 - Architectural Drawings.pdf\\Mac\Home\Documents\Snee Hall 1149_CENTRAL_2020_lisa@chiangobrien.pdf 101 ROOM NAME 1 A101 SIM 1 A101 SIM A101 1 SIM 1'-0" B1 W1 F1 101 ROOM NAME Name Elevation W1 A101 1 SIM DETAIL ENLARGEMENT WALL SECTION BUILDING SECTION DETAIL SECTION1 INTERIOR ELEVATION DOOR & INTERIOR WINDOW TAG WALL TAG ROOM IDENTIFICATION EXTERIOR WINDOW & LOUVER TAG ROOM FINISH KEY CONTRACT LIMIT LINE EXISTING DOOR NEW DOOR PARTITIONS, DOORS AND ITEMS TO BE REMOVED FULL HEIGHT PARTITION PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION NOTE KEY FLOOR ELEVATION 101 100 1 REVISION CLOUD & TAG PLAN ELEVATION 50' -6" SITE ELEVATION STRUCTURAL ELEVATION WORKING POINT WP CEILING HEIGHT EQUIPMENT TAG A101 SIM A1 A2 A3 A4 1 1i SCOPE LINE DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FRAMING AT NEW CONSTRUCTION, TYP. DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FINISH AT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FINISH 50 ' 6" 50'-6" 1 EXISTING PARTITION SET NUMBER ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND PATTERNSPROJECT INFORMATION Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 607.241.0244 G001 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 112 Hollister Drive Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CORNELL UNIVERSITY GENERAL G101FIRST FLOOR CODE CONFORMANCE PLAN HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AR101FIRST FLOOR ASBESTOS REMOVAL PLAN ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION AD101FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN ARCHITECTURAL A001TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS & WALL TYPES A101SNEE FIRST FLOOR PARTIAL PLAN - ROOM 1149 A102FIRST FLOOR PARTIAL FURNITURE PLAN (FOR REF ONLY) A151PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A251INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A601DOOR & SIGNAGE SCHEDULE PLUMBING DEMOLITION PD101FIRST FLOOR RM 1149 PLAN - PLUMBING MECHANICAL M001DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOLS, & ABBREVS. M101FIRST FLOOR RM 1149 PLANS - HVAC M501DETAILS M601SCHEDULES M701CONTROL SCHEMATICS ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION ED101FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN ELECTRICAL E001DRAWING INDEX, SCHEDULES, SYMBOL LISTS & NOTES E101FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN TELECOMMUNICATIONS TA001COVER SHEET TA101AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA102AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA501DETAILS & SCHEDULES - AV TA701AV SYSTEM DESIGN FOR REFERENCE ONLY - EXISTING DRAWINGS A01LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN A06LEVEL 1 RCP A10PARTITION TYPES AND DETAILS E05LEVEL 1 LIGHT E06LEVEL 1 POWER AND AUX P03LEVEL 1 PLUMBING PLAN T2-1. CA_CPFIRST FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING DATE: JOB NUMBER: CONSTRUCTION CLASSIFICATION: SPRINKLER PROTECTION: BUILDING USE CLASSIFICATION: TOTAL EXISTING BUILDING AREA: AREA OF RENOVATION: AREA OF ADDITION: TOTAL AREA OF PROJECT: IIB SP B OCCUPANCY 74,599 SF 558 SF 0 SF 558 SF LOCATION PLAN F|S Engineering, DPC 721 East Genesee Street, Syracuse, NY 13210.1505 315.471.4013 Tomei AV Consulting LLC 29 Janivar Drive Ithaca, NY 14850 607.592.5370 443 Electronics Pkwy Liverpool, New York 13088 315.457.5200 Barton & Loguidice Engineering SNEE 1149 1149 (1) LOCATION OF EXITS (2) EXIT ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCE: DISTANCE TO EXITS FROM THE MOST REMOTE POINT IN THE MOST REMOTE ROOM ON THE FLOOR (3) DIRECTION OF EGRESS TRAVEL, INCLUDING DIRECTION OF SWING OF DOORS (4) COMMON PATH OF EGRESS TRAVEL DIRECTION OF EGRESS TRAVEL INDICATED BY OR DIRECTION OF DOOR SWING IS SHOWN GRAPHICALLY FOR EACH DOOR SYMBOL ON DRAWING (IF APPLICABLE) (5) MINIMUM 1 HOUR CONSTRUCTION (6) MINIMUM 2 HOUR CONSTRUCTION E (7) SMOKE BARRIER (1 HOUR CONSTRUCTION) (8) ALTERATION LEVEL 2 WORK AREA (9) PRESUMED 1 HOUR CONSTRUCTION (10) PRESUMED 2 HOUR CONSTRUCTION 1161 1129 1120 1120A 1146 1013 1025 1013A 1012A 1012 1036 1150 1162A 1162 1102 1102A 1020 1124 1164A 1164 1142 1160 1035 1158 1140 1010A 1010 1011 1030 1002 1001 1030A 1038 DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAYDISPLAY 1160A UP UP UP UP DN UP E E TRAVEL DISTANCE -30' ALLOWABLE -300' TRAVEL DISTANCE -117' ALLOWABLE -300' FEC FEC 980 SF 558 SF 1149 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM TRAVEL DISTANCE -44' ALLOWABLE -100' ALTERNATE #2 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 N G101 FIRST FLOOR CODE CONFORMANCE PLAN 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive #Description Date 1161 1129 1149 1013 1013A 1012A 1012 1010 1038 DISPLAYDISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY ATRIUM ATRIUM WARNING New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, . DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 N AR101 FIRST FLOOR ASBESTOS REMOVAL PLAN 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 ALD2 CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 1/4" = 1'-0"A1 FIRST FLOOR ASBESTOS REMOVAL PLAN # Description Date ASBESTOS MATERIAL REMOVAL SCHEDULE APPROXIMATE QUANTITYMATERIALLEGEND REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF FLOOR TILE. (BLACK FLOOR TILE MASTIC IS NON-ACM) 600 SF GENERAL NOTES - ASBESTOS REMOVAL A. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COMPLETION OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL REMOVALS DEFINED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MEANS, METHODS, SUPERVISION, MANAGEMENT, AND SEQUENCING TO COMPLETE THE WORK. ADDITIONALLY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL EFFORTS TO COOPERATE AND COORDINATE WITH THE OTHER PROJECT CONTRACTORS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL BUILDING/ELECTRICAL HVAC SHUTDOWNS AND ISOLATION WITH THE OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL HOLD A CURRENT LICENSE IN THE STATE OF NEW YORK FOR ASBESTOS REMOVAL AND SHALL EMPLOY NYS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR CERTIFIED EMPLOYEES. SUFFICIENT STAFF SHALL BE PROVIDED TO COMPLETE THE ASBESTOS REMOVAL WITHIN THE SCHEDULED CONSTRUCTION PERIODS. C. MATERIAL REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROCEDURES IDENTIFIED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL AND APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL REGULATIONS. CONTRACTOR, AT HIS OWN EXPENSE, MAY OBTAIN A SITE VARIANCE FROM THE NYS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR. D. DRAWINGS INDICATE THE EXTENT OF ASBESTOS REMOVAL AND ARE TO BE USED AS A GUIDELINE. CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ILLUSTRATED ON THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND LISTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. E. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE PROPOSED DECONTAMINATION UNIT LOCATIONS, STAGING AREAS, AND WORK SITE ACCESS WITH BUILDING OWNER AND/OR THEIR REPRESENTATIVE. F. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR OF ANY DAMAGES TO THE BUILDING, BUILDING COMPONENTS, OR SYSTEMS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SCOPE THAT ARE CONSEQUENTLY DAMAGED AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S WORK. REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING LABORATORY BENCH TOP MASTIC. 2 SF NOTE: CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE CABINETRY TO ACCESS AND REMOVE ACM FLOOR TILE UNDER UNIT AS REQUIRED DURING THE WORK. 1161 1129 1149 1013 1013A 1012A 1012 1010 1038 DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAYDISPLAY ATRIUM ATRIUM D1 D5 D2D4 D4 D7 D8 D8 D3 DEMOLITION NOTES: D1. DEMOLISH FLOORING AND WALL BASE, ENTIRE SPACE, TYPICAL COORDINATE WITH HAZMAT DRAWINGS D2. DEMOLISH DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLY D3. DEMOLISH CEILING SOFFIT, SEE A151 D4. REMOVE TACKBOARD AND/OR CHALKBOARD AND DELIVER TO OWNER. D5. REMOVE & ABATE EXISTING COUNTERTOP, SINK, WALL & BASE CABINETS, COMPLETE. REMOVE EXISTING SHELVING, COMPLETE D6. SEE HAZMAT DRAWINGS FOR ABATEMENT D7. DEMOLISH DOOR, KEEP FRAME ASSEMBLY D8. REMOVE ALL SHELVING, COMPLETE D9. REMOVE EXISTING CONDUIT, PIPING, WIREMOLD, ETC.SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION, TYP. INDICATES WORK AREA WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 N AD101 FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 1/4" = 1'-0" A1 FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN 1149 -WEST WALL1149 -WEST WALL1149 -SOUTH WALL 1149 -SINK 1149 -SOUTH WALL 1149 -PARTIAL NORTH WALL D9 D4 D8 D9D9D9 D5 1149 -WEST WALL D9 1149 -EAST WALL D4 D8 1149 -EAST SOFFIT D9 1149 -NORTH WALL D9D9 D8D8 D9 D7 D3 #Description Date A ANSI -2003 FIG. 308.2.1 UNOBSTRUCTED FORWARD REACH FIG. 308.2.2 OBSTRUCTED HIGH FORWARD REACH FIG. 308.3.1 UNOBSTRUCTED SIDE REACH FIG. 308.3.2 OBSTRUCTED HIGH SIDE REACH PROTRUDING OBJECTS CLEAR FLOOR SPACE Unless otherwise specified may include knee and toe clearances CIRCULAR TURNING SPACE May include knee and toe clearances 'T-TURN' TURNING SPACE May include knee and toe clearances only at the end of either the base or one arm. GENERAL -TYPICAL CLEARANCES AND REACH RANGES 48" MAX 48" 15" MIN. 20" MAX 48" MAX 25" MAX 44" MAX 48" MAX 15" MIN. 46" MAX 24" MAX 34" MAX. 48" MAX 10" 34" MAX. 4" MAX 80" 27" 4'-0" 2'-6" 5'-0" 5'-0" 3'-0" 1'-0" 3'-0" 1'-0" EXCEPTIONS: (a) HANDRAILS MAY PROTRUDE 4-1/2" MAX. (b) DOOR CLOSERS & STOPS MAY BE 78" MIN. ABOVE THE FLOOR FIG. 307.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE • EXISTING WALL TYPE, INFILLS TO MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION 7 5/8" IWS TYPE: A METAL FURRING @ 16" O.C. GYPSUM BOARD 5/8" SEALANT, BOTH SIDES, ENTIRE PERIMETER 1 1/2" SEALANT, BOTH SIDES, ENTIRE PERIMETER MATCH EXISTING VIF WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A001 TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS & WALL TYPES 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 1 1/2" = 1'-0" C9 IWS # -CMU -8" #Description Date A251 F6 F3 1161 1129 1013 1013A 1012A 1012 1035 1038 DISPLAY DISPLAY ATRIUM KEEP EXISTING FRAME. PROVIDE NEW DOOR. PROVIDE WIRELESS CARD READER. COORDINATE WITH OWNER FOR WIRELESS CONNECTION 1149 B1 P1 F1 1149 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM 1'-2" INFILL WALL WHERE DOOR AND FRAME WERE REMOVED. TOOTH IN NEW CMU TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING. REPLACE BASE FOR ENTIRE LENGTH OF THIS SEGMENT OF WALL FROM CORNER TO CORNER. EXISTING FLOOR TO BE PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION. IF UNABLE TO PROTECT AND MAINTAIN WITHOUT DAMAGE, ALERT OWNER TO ARRANGE FOR HAZMAT TESTING PRIOR TO PROCEEDING. PATCH AND PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT SURFACES AS NEEDED WITH LIMITED DISRUPTION TO 1161 OCCUPANTS. GYPSUM BOARD TO BE FLUSH WITH ADJACENT SURFACES IN 1149. A601 A8 14" A L T E R N A T E # 1 C A S E W O R K 6 ' 0 " ALTERNATE #1 CASEWORK 24'-0" GMB GMB A FINISH NOTES: 1. ALL WALLS TO BE PAINTED P1 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGSBTO BE PAINTED P3 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON REFLECTED CEILING PLAN. 3. HM DOORS / FRAMES AND PAINTED WINDOW TRIM / FRAMES SHALL BE PAINTED P2 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. ALL WALL BASE TO BE B1 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. ALL CEILING TO BE PAINTED P3 WITH ALL EXPOSED MEP UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 6. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL WALL AND BASE FINISHES, TYPICAL. 7. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR ADDITIONAL FINISH INFORMATION, TYPICAL. 8. ALL FLOORING MATERIAL AND TRANSITIONS SHALL BE CENTERED UNDER THE DOOR IN THE CLOSED POSITION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 9. MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PANEL COVERS, GRILLES, ETC. TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL SURFACES. 10. NO LUXURY VINYL TILE TO BE CUT LESS THAN 6", 11. ALL METAL UNDER-COUNTER SUPPORT BRACKETS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL FINISH. 12. EXPOSED CMU TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL FINISH. FINISH LEGEND & KEY: WALL P1PAINT COLOR 1 P2PAINT COLOR 2 P3PAINT COLOR 3 FLOOR F1LUXURY VINYL TILE INSTALL PLANKS ASHLAR RUNNING IN NORTH/-SOUTH DIRECTION BASE B1RESILIENT BASE COLOR 1 ROOM # WALL FLOORBASE FINISH TAG WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A101 SNEE FIRST FLOOR PARTIAL PLAN ROOM 1149 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 1/4" = 1'-0" A3 FIRST FLOOR PARTIAL PLAN -1149 #Description Date A251 F6 F3 1161 1129 1013 1013A 1012A 1012 1038 DISPLAY DISPLAY ATRIUM 4'-10" 3'-9" EXISTING RELOCATED STORAGE CABINETS (BLUE). FURNISHED BY OWNER. CASEWORK -ALTERNATE 1 MICROSCOPE TABLES (24X41). FURNISHED BY OWNER. 1149 558 SF 1149 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM 41" 3'-0" 3'-10" 3'-6" 5'-0" CASEWORK -ALTERNATE 1 GMB GMB 1161 1129 1013 1013A 1012A 1012 1038 DISPLAY DISPLAY ATRIUM 4'-0" EXISTING RELOCATED STORAGE CABINETS WITH DRAWERS STACKED 2 HIGH. SECURE TO WALL. FURNISHED BY OWNER. MICROSCOPE TABLES (24X41). FURNISHED BY OWNER. 1149 558 SF 1149 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM 41" 3'-10" 3'-6" 3'-0" 2'-0" EXISTING RELOCATED STORAGE CABINETS (BLUE). FURNISHED BY OWNER. 3'-6" 3'-6" 4'-5 1/4" 5'-0" GMB GMB FLOOR PLAN NOTES: 1. SEE EXISTING PHOTOS FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE INFORMATION, TYPICAL. 2. PATCH ALL DAMAGED WALL SURFACES WITHIN ROOM 1149, TO MATCH EXISTING, TYPICAL. 3. ALL WALL INFILLS TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. PATCH ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. PROVIDE FINISHES AT ALL MEP REMOVAL LOCATIONS 5. PATCH ALL WALL PENETRATIONS TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION. 6. AT LOCATIONS WHERE OPENINGS ARE MADE IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO FACILITATE THE INSTALLATION OF MEP WORK, RESTORE TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS AND MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. 7. PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED AT ALL WALL-MOUNTED SHELVING, FURNITURE, A/V MONITORS, PROJECTION SCREENS, SPEAKERS AND ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT. 8. PROVIDE LEVEL 4 FINISH WITHIN ROOM 1149. PATCH OR ALTERNATIVELY PROVIDE NEW LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD CONSISTENTLY WITHIN 1149 UP TO STRUCTURALDECK. 9. COORDINATE ALL POWER AND DATA CONNECTIONS WITH POWER PLANS, EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE PLANS AND ELEVATIONS, TYP. WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 N A102 FIRST FLOOR PARTIAL FURNITURE PLAN (FOR REF ONLY) 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 1/4" = 1'-0" A6 FIRST FLOOR PARTIAL PLAN -1149 FURNITURE WITH ALTERNATE 1 CASEWORK 1/4" = 1'-0" A1 FIRST FLOOR PARTIAL PLAN -1149 FURNITURE WITH EXISTING CABINETS #Description Date RETURN AIR GRILLE SUPPLY AIR GRILLE PROJECTION SCREEN GYPSUM BOARD CEILING REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES: 3. ALL GYPSUM SOFFITS AND CEILINGS TO BE REPLACED AT EXISTING LOCATIONS AND CEILING HEIGHT. 5. REPAIR CEILINGS DAMAGED OR IMPACTED BY CONCEALED SCOPE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MEP AND AV WORK THAT IS NOT SPECIFICALLY DETAILED ON THIS DRAWING. 7. PROVIDE PROJECTOR MOUNT FOR INSTALLATION. 8. REPAIR CEILINGS AFFECTED BY AV WORK. 9. PAINT EXPOSED CONCRETE WAFFLE CEILING, GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS, SOFFITS P3. 10. PAINT ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK, CONDUIT, WIREMOLD, PIPES, ETC, P3 TO MATCH CEILING, TYPICAL. CEILING MATERIALS: OTHER: PROJECTOR 1149 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM 12'-10" 13'-7" PROJECTOR MOUNT, SEE AV DRAWINGS PROJECTION SCREEN, SEE AV DRAWINGS C5 A151 TYP METAL FRAMING AS REQUIRED GYPSUM WALL BOARD ON SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATCH EXISTING CORNER BEAD, TYP. WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 N A151 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 1/4" = 1'-0" C7 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR RCP -1149 3" = 1'-0" C5 GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT #Description Date D5 A251 TYP 7'-2" 3'-8" 4'-4" 3'-6" 2'-0" 3'-6" 2'-0" 2'-6" 2'-6" D3 A251 TYP 42" GMBGMB 4'-0" 8'-0" PROJECTION SCREEN -SEE AV DRAWINGS C L 11'-11"11'-11"D7 A251 TYP 3'-0"3'-0" 7'-2" ALTERNATE 1 6'-0" SPEAKER -SEE AV DRAWINGS 8'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES: 1.REFER TO FINISH TAG FOR BASE MATERIAL 2. ALL SUPPORT BRACKETS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL SURFACE. 3. PATCH AND REPAIR, ANY DAMAGED WALL SURFACES FROM REMOVAL OF EXISTING BLACKBOARDS, MARKERBOARD, TACKBOARDS, WIREMOLD, PIPES, CONDUIT, ETC. 4. GMB: GLASS MARKER BOARD 5. FWTP: FABRIC WRAPPED TACK PANEL 6. ALL CABINETS ARE ALTERNATE #1 (WOOD). 1'-0" 3" CONTINUOUS BASE ADJUSTABLE SHELVES PULL CABINET DOOR TALL CABINET 4" 1'-2" ADJUSTABLE SHELVES CONTINUOUS BASE 7'-2" SOLID SURFACE TOP POWER & DATA FOR MICROSCOPE TABLES 2'-10" FINISHED END PANEL CABINET DRAWER CONTINUOUS BASE PULL 4 1/2" 3 EQ 3" 1'-2" 7'-2" 4" WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A251 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 1/4" = 1'-0" F3 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM -SHELVING (ALTERNATE 1) 1/4" = 1'-0" F6 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM -TEACHING WALL 3/4" = 1'-0" D7 TALL STORAGE CABINET -DOOR (ALTERNATE 1) 3/4" = 1'-0" D5 TALL STORAGE CABINET -BASE WITH DOOR (ALTERNATE 1) 3/4" = 1'-0" D3 TALL DRAWER CABINET (ALTERNATE 1) #Description Date DOOR TYPES: D1 6"6" 6 1/2" 10" NOTE: WHERE WOOD IS INDICATED FOR MATERIAL, PROVIDE STILE-AND-RAIL WOOD DOORS 1149 Name Title 8" BRAILLE 55" A.F.F. 60" A.F.F. 5" 3/8" 2 1/2" 8" 1 1/2" C L 3/8" 3" (4-1/4" x 5 1/2" WINDOW) SIGN TYPE A 1/8" MATTE ACRYLIC SUB SURFACE SCREENED, BACKGROUND COLORS TBD CHANGEABLE INSERT: 4-1/4" X 5 1/2" TYPEFACE: HELVETICA MEDIUM NAME & TITLE: 5/8" ROOM NUMBER: 1-1/2" UC RAISED BRAILE: GRADE II SURFACE MOUNTED CLEAR 1" RAISED BAR, COLOR TO MATCH LETTERING 1/2" SIGNAGE NOTES: 1. ALL SIGNAGE TO COMPLY WITH THE OWNER GRAPHIC STANDARDS. 2. TACTILE LETTERING HELVETICA MEDIUM TYPEFACE. 3. ALL SIGNAGE TO COMPLY WITH ADA MINIMUM CHARACTER SPACES OF 1/8". 4. FABRICATOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ACCURATELY CREATING GRADE 2 BRAILLE IN SUPPORT OF THE TACTILE MESSAGE. 5. ALL SYMBOLS AND PICTOGRAMS TO COMPLY WITH OWNER GRAPHIC STANDARDS. 6. ALL COLORS WILL BE SELECTED BY OWNER AND ARCHITECT IN COMPLIANCE WITH OWNER STANDARD. ROOM SIGN TYPE A ALIGN RAISED BAR TO CMU JOINT, 56" A.F.F, V.I.F. WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A601 DOOR & SIGNAGE SCHEDULE 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive SHEET SCHEDULE - DOOR AND FRAME DOOR NUMBER Room NumberRoom Name FRAMEDOORFIRE RATING HARDWARE GROUPCOMMENTSDOOR NUMBER ELEVMATERIALHEADJAMBGLAZINGELEVMATERIALSIZEGLAZING 11491149MICROSCOPY CLASSROOMEXISTING--EXISTI NGEXISTING--D1WD3'-0" X 7'-0"FRG-23/4 HR6WIRELESS CARD READER1149 3" = 1'-0" D8 SIGN TYPES 3/4" = 1'-0" A8 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM #Description Date SAN (E) SAN (E) V (E) G (E) CA (E) CA (D) CA (E) CA (D) G (E) G (E) CA (E) CA (E) CA (E) DISCONNECT SINK, CAP PIPING IN WALL REMOVE CA OUTLET ON WALL REMOVE CA & G OUTLETS ON WALL REMOVE CA & G OUTLETS ON WALL SAN (E) SAN (E) 1149 1.SURVEY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND CORRELATE WITH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED TO DETERMINE EXTENT OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION REQUIRED. 2.COORDINATE ALL REQUIRED SHUTDOWNS OF EXISTING SYSTEMS WITH OWNER. 3.MAINTAIN SERVICES/SYSTEMS INDICATED TO REMAIN AND PROTECT THEM AGAINST DAMAGE. 4.REMOVE PORTIONS OF PIPING INDICATED TO BE REMOVED AND CAP OR PLUG REMAINING PIPING WITH SAME OR COMPATIBLE PIPING MATERIAL. 5.DISCONNECT AND CAP SERVICES TO EQUIPMENT/FIXTURES TO BE REMOVED. REMOVE FIXTURE ROUGH-INS, SANITARY, VENT AND DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, INSULATION, HANGERS AND ACCESSORIES. CAP PIPING AT MAINS. CAP WATER PIPING AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO MAINS. DO NOT LEAVE "DEADLEGS". GENERAL REMOVAL NOTES FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 PD101 FIRST FLOOR RM 1149 PLAN PLUMBING 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 DDD CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" PD101 A4PARTAIL FIRST FLOOR DEMO PLAN-1149 #Description Date ISSUE: DATE: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: SCALE: PROJECT NO. SHEET TITLE SHEET DRAWING NO. ALTERATION OF THIS DOCUMENT EXCEPT BY A LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, IS A VIOLATION OF NEW YORK STATE EDUCATIONAL LAW. OF FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 Enter address here R:\Revit MEP 2012\Templates\S&A_Mechanical.rte 10/5/2011 4:16:29 PM Owner Project Name SK-M2 01/01/2019 Author Checker Project Number Unnamed MARKDATEDESCRIPTION 14/10RECTANGULAR DUCT (SIZE IN INCHES) ROUND DUCT (DIAMETER IN INCHES) 14Ø AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER VOLUME DAMPER SMOKE DAMPER FIRE DAMPER SD VD FD SYMBOLDESCRIPTION AAD DUCTWORK SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS FIRE SMOKE DAMPER FSD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR (FURNISHED & WIRED BY DIV 28, MOUNTED BY DIV 23. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS) DSD OVAL DUCT (SIZE IN INCHES) 14/10Ø LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK SYMBOLS SINGLE LINEDOUBLE LINE DESCRIPTION DIRECTION OF FLOW DUCT SIZE, FIRST FIGURE IS SIZE SHOWN12/2012/20 SUPPLY DUCT SECTION (POSITIVE) PRESSURE, FIRST FIGURE IS TOP 20/1220/12 RETURN / EXHAUST DUCT SECTION 20/1220/12 ROUND SIDE TAP WITH VOLUME DAMPER (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) 90° BRANCH TAKE OFF (45° ENTRY TYPE FOR RECTANGULAR DUCT)1-1/4A)XB (MIN) VD VD AxB 4" (MIN) 45° VD VD VD DUAL 90° BRANCH TAKE OFF (45° ENTRY TYPE) FLEXIBLE DUCT FLEX CONNECTION ACCESS DOORAD AD GRILLE REGISTER OR DIFFUSER IN BOTTOM OF DUCT DUCT ELBOW UP OR DOWN TURN UP TURN DOWN 12x6 TURN DOWN 12x6 TURN UP OR LONG RADIUS 90 DEGREE ELBOW OR TURNING VANES TRANSITION: LOCATION OF TRANS. IS DIAGRAMMATICAL CONTRACTOR MAY EXTEND LENGTH OF LARGER DUCT TO ACCOMMODATE STD. LENGTH DUCT SECTIONS. CONTRACTOR'S OPTION AS SHOWN 90 DEGREE BRANCH TAKEOFF FROM VERTICAL DUCT-45 DEGREE ENTRY TYPE ELEV. PLAN PLAN ELEV. DUCT RISE / DROP TO AVOID OBSTRUCTION ARROW INDICATES AIR FLOW DIRECTION 90° BRANCH TAKE OFF (TEE TYPE FOR ROUND DUCT) RISE RD DROPRISE UPDN DROP VD VD RETURN / EXHAUST DUCT PENETRATION OF FLOOR OR ROOF ABOVE. SEE PLANS FOR DAMPER REQUIREMENTS SUPPLY DUCT PENETRATION OF FLOOR OR ROOF ABOVE. SEE PLANS FOR DAMPER REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL PIPING SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS SHUTOFF VALVE (REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPECIFIC TYPE) CHECK VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE BALL VALVE PETCOCK CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVE UNION PRESSURE GAUGE (WITH VALVE) TEMPERATURE SENSOR DRAIN VALVE WITH CAPPED AND CHAINED HOSE END PIPE UP / PIPE DOWN (ELBOW) BRANCH CONNECTION -UP / DOWN CONCENTRIC REDUCER PIPING (ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF FLOW) PIPE ANCHOR PIPE GUIDE GLOBE VALVE PIPE CAP PITCH OF PIPE STRAINER W/ BLOW OFF STRAINER MVAV PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE TEMPERATURE WELL THERMOMETER TRIPLE DUTY VALVE CONDENSATE "P"-TRAP DN UP PS FS PRESSURE SWITCH FLOW SWITCH EXPANSION JOINT PRESSURE REDUCING REGULATOR VALVE T GATE VALVE 2-WAY CONTROL VALVE 3-WAY CONTROL VALVE MANUAL AIR VENT / AUTOMATIC AIR VENT SYMBOLDESCRIPTION SPECIFIC SHUTOFF VALVE TYPES: SUPPLY DIFFUSER PLAN SYMBOL EXPLANATION: CFM SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER (NOMINAL 2' x 2') SUPPLY DIFFUSER TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE) RETURN / EXHAUST AIR REGISTER CFM SL8 REGISTER/GRILLE PLAN SYMBOL EXPLANATION: CFM (E = EXHAUST / R = RETURN) REGISTER/GRILLE TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE) CFM RE10 SYMBOLDESCRIPTION GRILLE, REGISTER & DIFFUSER SYMBOLS LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSER WITH DISTRIBUTION PLENUM REGISTER AND DIFFUSER AIR FLOW PATTERNS 4-WAY BLOW3-WAY BLOW2-WAY BLOW DUCTWORK EXISTING TO REMAIN IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT DUCTWORK REMOVED IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT POINT OF CONNECTION -NEW TO EXISTING POINT OF REMOVAL -DEMOLITION TO EXISTING DEDICATED ELECTRICAL AREA -NO MECHANICAL WORK ALLOWED IN OR ABOVE HIGHLIGHTED AREA UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE PIPE REMOVED IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT PIPE EXISTING TO REMAIN IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT SYS (E) SYSTEM NAME (E) = EXIST TO REMAIN, (D) = EXIST TO BE REMOVED DUCTWORK PROVIDED IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT PIPE PROVIDED IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT SYS (D) SYS SYS (D) SYS (10x6) SYS (E) (10) SYS (E) DEMOLITION KEYED NOTE KEYED NOTE SYSTEM PHASING SYMBOLS M# MD# ? ?PLAN DETAIL BUILDING SECTION DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED EXTENT OF DETAIL EXTENT OF DETAIL A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 A4 B4 C4 D4 E4 A5 B5 C5 D5 E5 A6 B6 C6 D6 E6 DETAIL NUMBER DETAIL SCALE DETAIL NAME DETAIL NUMBER PLAN SETUP SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED CAUTION: THESE DOCUMENTS WERE DIGITALLY PRODUCED AND/OR REPRODUCED. CONFIRM REDUCTION OR MAGNIFICATION USING DIMENSIONAL 3"-LONG LINE IN TITLE BARS. IF SCALING DRAWINGS FOR APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS, ALTERNATE ARCHITECTURAL SCALES MAY BE USED AS FOLLOWS: DOCUMENT REDUCTION/MAGNIFICATION SCALE IF LINE MEASURES 2”(67% COPY): USE 3/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 3/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG IF LINE MEASURES 1.5”(50% COPY): USE 1/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 31/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG 3" 3" ? ? ? ?XXX X" = X" FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 M001 DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOLS & ABBREVS. 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 TAM CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive MECHANICAL DRAWING INDEX NUMBERNAME REVISIONS #DATE M001DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOLS & ABBREVS. M101FIRST FLOOR RM 1149 PLANS - HVAC M501DETAILS M601SCHEDULES M701CONTROL SCHEMATICS HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA INTERIOR DESIGN CONDITIONS HEATING70 deg F DB COOLING75 deg F DB / 63 deg F DB OUTDOOR DESIGN CONDITIONS SUMMER88 deg F DB / 75 deg F WB WINTER-5 deg F DB CLIMATE ZONE6 HVAC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ITEMYESNO DUCT SMOKE DETECTORSX FIRE DAMPERSX SMOKE DAMPERSX FIRE RATED ENCLOSUREX FIRE RATED ROOF / FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLYX FIRE STOPPING (REFER TO DIVISION 7)X SMOKE CONTROLX ECONOMIZER CONTROLN/A DUCT SEALINGX GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES AREFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CEILING GRID WORK PREFORMED BY OTHERS. IF NOT SHOWN ELSEWHERE INCLUDE IN THIS DIVISIONS WORK AS REQUIRED. BWHERE WORK ISN'T SHOWN BY OTHERS, HVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE, STORE, AND REINSTALL EXISTING LAY-IN CEILING TILES & TEES AS REQUIRED FOR ALL WORK SHOWN. CHVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE LEFT OR RIGHT UNIT CONNECTION ORIENTATION. DHVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL UNIT TO ALLOW FOR MAINTENANCE ACCESS TO FILTERS, VALVES, CONTROLS, LUBRICATION POINTS, INCLUDING MOVING EXISTING INTERERENCES SUCH AS CONDUITS, WIRINGS AND PIPING. EHVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL HIRE OWNER APPROVED ROOFING CONTRACTOR AS TO NOT VOID ROOF WARRANTY. FCONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS, AND REPORT DISCREPANCIES TO THE ARCHITECT / ENGINEER AND AWAIT CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH REMOVAL AND RENOVATION WORK. GTHE INTENT OF THIS PROJECT IS TO PROVIDE A DDC BASED CONTROL SYSTEM TO REPLACE ALL EXISTING PNEUMATIC CONTROLS. REMOVE ALL EXISTING PNEUMATIC TUBING, THERMOSTATS, VALVES, ACTUATORS, ETC. AND REPLACE W/ DDC. CONFIRM SIZES, QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS PRIOR TO BID. LATLEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE LWTLEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE MAX.MAXIMUM MBH1,000 BTUH MCAMINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY MGAPMEDICAL GAS ALARM PANEL MIN.MINIMUM MOCPMAXIMUM OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MTDMOUNTED NCNORMALLY CLOSED NICNOT IN CONTRACT NONORMALLY OPEN NOM.NOMINAL NTSNOT TO SCALE OAOUTSIDE AIR OAIOUTDOOR AIR INTAKE OEDOPEN-END DUCT PDPRESSURE DROP PHPHASE PLBG.CONTRACTOR FOR PLUMBING DIVISION PRVPRESSURE REDUCING VALVE PSPRESSURE SWITCH / SENSOR PSIPOUNDS PER SQUARE INCH RARETURN AIR RHRELATIVE HUMIDITY RVRELIEF VALVE SASUPPLY AIR SENS.SENSIBLE SPLSOUND PRESSURE LEVEL SWLSOUND POWER LEVEL TATRANSFER AIR TCTEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR TDVTRIPLE DUTY VALVE TOSTOP OF STEEL TSTAMPER SWITCH UHUNIT HEATER UNOUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE VRAVENTILATION RELIEF AIR VRSVENTILATION SUPPLY AIR WBWET BULB ZVBZONE VALVE BOX AAVAIR ADMITTANCE VALVE AFFABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFGABOVE FINISHED GRADE BFFBELOW FINISHED FLOOR BFGBELOW FINISHED GRADE BOSBOTTOM OF STEEL BTUHBRITISH THERMAL UNIT PER HOUR CFMCUBIC FEET PER MINUTE COCLEANOUT COPCOEFFICIENT OF PERFORMANCE DBDRY BULB DIA.DIAMETER °FDEGREES FARENHEIT EAEXHAUST AIR EATENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE EFF.EFFICIENCY ELEC.CONTRACTOR FOR ELECTRICAL DIVISION EWTENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE EXTEXISTING EXT. PDEXTERNAL PRESSURE DROP FFFINISHED FLOOR FLFAIL LAST FLAFULL LOAD AMPACITY FLRFLOOR FPCONTRACTOR FOR FIRE PROTECTION FPMFEET PER MINUTE FSFLOW SWITCH FSDFIRE / SMOKE DAMPER FTFEET FT-HDFEET OF HEAD (PRESSURE) GCCONTRACTOR FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION GPMGALLONS PER MINUTE GRDGRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS HGTHEIGHT HPHORSEPOWER HVACCONTRACTOR FOR HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING DIVISION IN-WCINCHES OF WATER COLUMN (PRESSURE) IN.INCH HVAC DUCT SYSTEM ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV.DESCRIPTION EAEXHAUST AIR OAOUTDOOR AIR PAPRIMARY AIR RARETURN AIR SASUPPLY AIR HVAC PIPE SYSTEM ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV.DESCRIPTION CDCONDENSATE DRAIN HWRHOT WATER RETURN HWSHOT WATER SUPPLY HVAC EQUIPMENT ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV.DESCRIPTION EFFAN FCU-1FAN-COIL UNIT FTR-AFINNED TUBE RADIATION TUVARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX TU-RVARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX - RETURN TU-SVARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX - SUPPLY UHUNIT HEATER VAVVARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEER'S PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT, THE DESIGN OF THIS PROJECT CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: THE 2020 NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM FIRE PREVENTION AND BUILDING CODE THE 2020 NEW YORK STATE ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE, 2016 ASHRAE 90.1, AND 2007 ASHRAE 183; FOLLOWING THE COMPLIANCE PATH MARKED BELOW: ANSI / ASHRAE / IESNA 90.1, AS AMENDED BY 19 NYCRR PART 1240. IECC CHAPTER 4 [CE] PRESCRIPTIVE PROVISIONS (SECTIONS C402, C403, C404, C405, C408 AND ONE OF THE SIX OPTIONS IN SECTION C406 AS NOTED BELOW: MORE EFFICIENT HVAC PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.2. REDUCED LIGHTING POWER DENSITY SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.3. ENHANCED LIGHTING CONTROL IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.4. ON-SITE SUPPLY OF RENEWABLE ENERGY IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.5. PROVISION OF A DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM FOR CERTAIN HVAC EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.6. HIGH-EFFICIENCY SERVICE WATER HEATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.7. ENHANCED ENVELOPE PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.8. REDUCED AIR INFILATRATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.9. TOTAL BUILDING PERFORMANCE PROVISIONS (SECTION C407) THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION DEPARTMENT ("SED") MANUAL OF PLANNING STANDARDS THE 2014 FGI GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF HOSPITALS AND OUTPATIENT FACILITIES THE 2018 FGI GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF: HOSPITALS OUTPATIENT FACILITIES RESIDENTIAL HEALTH, CARE, AND SUPPORT FACILITIES ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED #Description Date T T CO2TS TSTS MD2 MD1 MD1 MD5MD6 MD1 MD1 1149 MD9 MD9 MD9 MD9 MD9 MD9 MD9 MD9 1149 TU-S1 CONNECT TO EXST. 16" DIA SA DUCT CONNECT TO EXST. 3/4" HWS/HWR PIPING 12" SA-10" 350 SA-10" 350 VD TYP BALANCE EXST. RETURN TU AND ASSOCIATED GRILLE TO 700 CFM MAX AND 300 CFM MIN. 1149 400 CFM 400 CFM 820 CFM 820 CFM 1720 CFM FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 M101 FIRST FLOOR RM 1149 PLANS -HVAC 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 TAM CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive NOTE: 1. MOUNT ALL DUCTWOTK AND EQUIPMENT HIGH AS POSSIBLE. COORDINATE WITH ALL EXISTING TO REMAIN LIGHTING AND OTHER SERVICES. 2. BALANCE EXISTING UNITS TO CFM INDICATED. 3. ALL NEW DUCTWORK, EQUIPMENT AND PIPING IN 1149 IS EXPOSED. INSTALL AND INSULATE PER SPECIFICATIONS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS AND COORDINATE FOR PAINTING REQUIREMENTS. 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" M101 1FIRST FLOOR RM 1149 DEMO -HVAC 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" M101 2FIRST FLOOR RM 1149 -HVAC MECHANICAL KEYED NOTES MD1DISCONNECT AND REMOVE DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES INCLUDING HANGERS AND GRILLES/ DIFFUSERS. MD2DISCONNECT AND REMOVE HWS/HWR PIPING AND ACCESSORIES. MD5DISCONNECT AND REMOVE VAV TERMINAL UNIT AND ACCESSORIES INCLUDING CONTROLS AND WIRING. MD6DISCONNECT AND REMOVE TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ACCESSORIES INCLUDING WIRING. MD9PROVIDE PRE-BALANCE REPORTS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION FOR EXISTING AIRFLOWS FOR EQUIPMENT NOTED. #Description Date DAMPER SHALL BE IN NECK OF DIFFUSER, U.N.O. TAP LOCATION IS DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. ACTUAL LOCATION MAY BE ON TOP, BOTTOM OR SIDE. SEE PLANS SECURE FLEX TO COLLAR & DUCT ELBOW W/ DRAW BAND OR SCREWS. DO NOT TAPE JOINTS RIGID DUCT TO WITHIN 4' 0" OF DIFFUSER 6" SHEET METAL COLLAR EXTENSION SECURED TO DIFFUSER, AS REQUIRED SUPPLY-AIR DUCT SIZE PER PLANS SPIN-IN COLLAR W/ LOCKING VOLUME DAMPER SUPPORT DEVICES FROM ABOVE STRUCTURE, INDEPENDENT OF CEILING SYSTEM, AS REQUIRED PLENUM INLET COLLAR PROVIDE HANGER SUPPORTS, AS REQUIRED, TO ALLOW FULL RADIUS ELBOW AND PREVENT KINKING (TYP) FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK MAXIMUM LENGTH = 6'-0" (TYP) SQUARE DIFFUSER LINEAR DIFFUSER KEYED NOTES: TYPICAL FOR ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS CEILING 1 3 22 1 2 3 1" INTERNAL ACOUSTIC DUCT LINED DOUBLE WALL DUCT FOR A DISTANCE OF 10 FEET FROM UNIT OUTLET. LOCATE VALVES AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR CONVENIENT ACCESS AND REMOVAL. TRANSITION SUPPLY DUCT FROM RUN OUT DUCT SIZE SHOWN ON PLAN TO UNIT INLET SIZE. V P/T PORT FLOW BALANCER MANUAL AIR VENT UNION (TYP) TERMINAL UNIT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION SUPPLY AIR DUCT 1/2" DRAIN WITH HOSE BIBB 2 WAY CONTROL VALVE SHUTOFF VALVE MAINS KEYED NOTES: R S 1 2 3 1 3 2 BOTTOM FLANGE MOUNTED "C" CLAMP WITH SET SCREW, LOCKNUT & RETAINING STRAP. (FOR USE ON BEAMS ONLY, NOT ALLOWED ON JOISTS) VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICE ASSEMBLY FOR, FANS, AIR HANDLING UNITS, FAN/COIL UNITS, ETC. TOP FLANGE MOUNTED "C" CLAMP WITH SET SCREW & LOCKNUT. (FOR USE ON BEAMS ONLY, NOT ALLOWED ON JOISTS) CONCENTRIC BEAM CLAMP WITH THREADED, WELDED EYEROD. FOR USE WITH JOISTS AND BEAMS. STEEL ALL-THREAD RODS. STEEL PLATE WASHER WITH DOUBLE NUT. A. PROVIDE LINKED EYELETS WITH STUD, AT CONNECTION TO SLOPING STRUCTURE WITH PITCH OF 1 IN 12 OR GREATER. BENDING OF HANGER RODS NOT ALLOWED. FLOOR / ROOF DECKING ASSEMBLY. BEAM KEYED NOTES: JOIST NOTES: CHANNEL SPANNING BETWEEN BEAMS AND/OR JOISTS IN DECKING "CAVITY". SET ON AND SECURE TO BEAMS AND JOISTS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 7 2 6 5 3 4 6 1/4" TUBING OR PIPING UP TO 2" RISER. 1/2" FOR LARGER RISERS. PETCOCK OR HOSE BIBB IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION HOSE END CONNECTION WITH CAP PROVIDE 8" SQUARE ACCESS DOOR WHERE ASSEMBLY IS LOCATED ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CONSTRUCTION EXTEND HOSE END TO WITHIN 12" OF CEILING ACCESS DOOR LOCATION A. PROVIDE AIR VENT AT ALL HIGH POINTS OF PIPING AND WHERE NOTED ON DRAWINGS. 6" HIGH AIR CHAMBER SAME SIZE AS PIPING UP TO 2" DIA. MAXIMUM. 2" DIA. FOR LARGER PIPING. RISER NOTE: [ ] CURB FURNISHED BY HVAC DIVISION. [ ] CURB INSTALLED BY DIVISION 1. [ ] CURB BY BUILDING MANUFACTURER. [ ] BY HVAC DIVISION. [ ] BY DIVISION 1. [ ] BY BUILDING MANUFACTURER. [ ] GRAVITY OPERATED BACKDRAFT DAMPER. [ ] MOTOR OPERATED BACKDRAFT DAMPER. OPENING AND ANGLE FRAME CONNECT DUCT TO CURB/DAMPER FRAME AS REQ'D 4" INSULATE PLENUM AND FIRST 10FT. OF DUCT. EXHAUST-BRANCH DUCT SIZE & QTY PER PLANS EXHAUST DUCT RISER, FULL SIZE OF CURB INLET OPENING DRIP PAN FORMED BY SOLDERING SEAMS WATER-TIGHT, 3" DEEP FAN ROOF CURB ROOFING JOIST OR BEAM 6" KEYED NOTES: 3 1 2 1 2 3 FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 M501 DETAILS 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 TAM CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M501 1Flexible Duct To Diffuser SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M501 4VAV Terminal Unit SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M501 5Hanger Support Fastening SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M501 6Manual Air Vent SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M501 2UPBLAST FUME EXHAUST FAN#Description Date PIPE SIZE (IN) 141 -200 105 -140 61 -104 40 -60 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE FLUID TEMP RANGE (°F) CONDUCTIVITY BTU*IN/(hr*FT2*°F) MEAN RATING TEMP (°F) INSULATION THICKNESS (IN) 1.5 2.0 1.0 N/A 1.0 1.5 0.5 .05 1.5 1.0 125 125 100 100 N/A 75 75 75 75 75 0.25 -0.29 0.25 -0.29 0.21 -0.28 0.21 -0.28 N/A 0.21 -0.27 0.21 -0.27 0.20 -0.26 0.20 -0.26 0.20 -0.26 < 1-1/2 1-1/2 to </= 8 < 1-1/2 1-1/2 to </= 8 ALL < 1-1/2 1-1/2 to </= 8 < 1 1 to </= 8 > 8 < 40 NOTES: 1. FOR EXTERIOR PIPING, PROVIDE ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE JACKET, MATERIAL AS SPECIFIED. 2. PROVIDE HEAT TRACING WHERE NOTED, AND INSULATION FOR HEAT-PUMP PIPING SERVING ROOFTOP UNITS. 3. PROVIDE FACTORY APPLIED ASJ FOR ALL FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION. 4. PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON ALL SYSTEMS OPERATING BELOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE. 5. PROVIDE DOUBLE THICKNESS INSULATION FOR EXTERIOR, ABOVE-GRADE PIPING. 6. PROVIDE PVC JACKET ON ALL INTERIOR, INSULATED, EXPOSED PIPING. PIPING EXPOSED IN MECHANICAL ROOM DOES NOT REQUIRE A PVC JACKET UNLESS NOTED ON PLANS. 7. PIPE INSULATION SHALL BE PAINTABLE. SERVICE UNCONDITIONED SPACE R-6 WITHIN BUILDING ENVELOPE DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE MINIMUM INSTALLED "R" VALUE ( CLIMATE ZONES 5 THROUGH 8) NOTES: 1. ENERGY CODE DOES NOT REQUIRE INSULATION, HOWEVER INSULATION IS REQUIRED TO PREVENT CONDENSATION ON DUCTWORK. PROVIDE A MINIMUM THICKNESS. 2. PROVIDE R-12 IF DUCTED TO AN ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT. 3. PROVIDE R-6 IF DUCTED TO AN ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT. 4. PROVIDE FIELD APPLIED JACKET. INSIDE BUILDING ENVELOPE INDIRECTLY CONDITIONED SPACE CONDITIONED SPACE R-12 OUTSIDE BUILDING ENVELOPE (NOTE 4) R-12 R-6 R-6 R-6NONE R-6R-5 R-12R-12 NONE (NOTE 3) R-6R-5 R-6NONE HEATING AND/OR AIR-CONDITIONING SUPPLY AIR HEATING AND/OR AIR-CONDITIONING RETURN AIR HEAT PUMP SUPPLY AIR TRANSFER AIR DUCTS OUTSIDE-AIR DUCTS, PLENUMS, MIXING BOXES LOUVER BLANK-OFFS RELIEF-AIR DUCTS AND PLENUMS EXHAUST AIR DUCTS LEAVING ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT VENTILATION SUPPLY AIR BELOW 60 DEG F VENTILATION SUPPLY AIR ABOVE 60 DEG F NONE R-5 R-12 R-5 NONE R-12R-12 R-12R-12 R-12R-12 R-12R-12 R-12N/A R-12R-12 R-12R-12 NONENONE NONENONE NONE (NOTE 3) R-6R-1.3 R-6R-6 AIR-CONDITIONING SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR THROUGH POOL AREAS VENTILATION SUPPLY AIR BELOW 60 DEG F, THROUGH POOL AREAS R-1.3 R-6 R-12 R-12R-12 R-6R-1.3 R-6R-6 VENTILATION SUPPLY AIR ABOVE 60 DEG F, THROUGH POOL AREAS CONCEALED KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCTWORK R-1.3 R-6 R-12 R-12R-12 R-12 R-12 DEFINITIONS: 1. UNCONDITIONED SPACE:INCLUDES SPACES NOT DIRECTLY HEATED OR COOLED SUCH AS VENTED AND UNVENTED ATTICS, SHAFTS AND VENTED CRAWLSPACES. 2. INDIRECTLY CONDITIONED SPACE:SPACES THAT ARE NOT CONDITIONED DIRECTLY BUT HAVE UNINSULATED SURFACES SEPARATING THEM FROM CONDITIONED SPACES AND ARE INCLUDED WITHIN THE INSULATED ENVELOPE OF THE BUILDING. 3. CONDITIONED SPACE:AN AREA OR ROOM WITHIN A BUILDING BEING HEATED OR COOLED, OR WITH A FIXED OPENING DIRECTLY INTO AN ADJACENT CONDITIONED SPACE. EXHAUST AIR DUCTS R-6R-5R-5R-12N/A NONE (NOTE 2) NONE (NOTE 2) N/A (NOTE 2) N/A (NOTE 2) SEE NOTE 1SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1SEE NOTE 1 NONENONE FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 M601 SCHEDULES 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 TAM CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive VAV TERMINAL UNIT SCHEDULE MARK INLET SIZE (IN) CFMHEATING COILMAX DISCHARGE NC REMARKS MAXMINCFMMBHEAT (°F)LAT (°F)GPM TUS11270030030014.5551001.5251,2 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE COIL & ROWS SIZED FOR 130 DEG F SUPPLY REHEAT WATER AND 100 DEG F RETURN. 3. BOD PRICE DESV. GRILLE AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE MARKMANUFACTURERMODELFRAMEFINISH EAPRICE530SEE PLANSWHITE SAPRICESCDASEE PLANSWHITE SBPRICESCSSEE PLANSWHITE NOTES: 1.PROVIDE OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER FOR ALL DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS. 2.COORDINATE MOUNTING FRAME FOR EACH APPLICATION. 3.SUBMIT COLOR CHART TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW. 4.MAX N.C. LEVEL OF NC-25. 5.SUBMIT COMPLETE CHART FOR EACH ROOM WITH ALL INFORMATION. 6.SB TYPE: LINEAR 4'-0" LENGTH, (2) 3/4" SLOTS W/ PLENUM. #Description Date AIAV: SETPOINT BI AO AO AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) AV: POSITION FEEDBACK(%) AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) AO AIAV: TEMP RISE DEG F AO AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) AV: POSITION FEEDBACK(%) AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION VARIABLE VOLUME SUPPLY BOX (VAV-#) COOLING BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATING CONTROL FOR INTERIOR VAV BOXES WITHOUT ASSOCIATED BASEBOARD HEAT IS THE SAME WITH DELETION OF BASEBOARD HEAT POINTS AND SEQUENCES. GENERAL SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF STARTING AND STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR SEVEN DIFFERENT DAILY SCHEDULES PER WEEK. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. BASIS OF DESIGN MINIMUM COOLING AND HEATING AIRFLOW SETPOINT IS TO BE 30% OF THE MAXIMUM COOLING AIRFLOW SETPOINT. SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: 75 °F +/-1.5 °F OCCUPIED SETBACK: 75 °F +3 °F UNOCCUPIED: 75 °F +6 °F SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: 70 °F +/-1.5 °F OCCUPIED SETBACK: 70 °F -3 °F UNOCCUPIED: 70 °F -6 °F SV AIRFLOW RATE: CFM HEATING: AS SCHEDULED CFM COOLING: AS SCHEDULED EV AIRFLOW RATE: CFM HEATING: AS SCHEDULED CFM COOLING: AS SCHEDULED MINIMUM SPACE OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: 30 MINUTES ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: 6 AM TO 8 PM, MON-FRI SPACE OCCUPANCY ZONE OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF A TIME OF DAY SCHEDULE AND A SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSOR. DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPANCY PERIOD, THE ZONE SHALL BE INITIALLY INDEXED TO OCCUPIED AND OPERATE FOR A MINIMUM OF 30 MINUTES, AT WHICH TIME THE SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSOR SHALL INDEX THE SPACE BETWEEN OCCUPIED AND OCCUPIED SETBACK MODE. IF THE SPACE BECOMES OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, AS DETERMINED VIA THE OCCUPANCY SENSOR, THE ZONE SHALL BE INDEXED TO OCCUPY FOR THE DURATION OF OCCUPANCY. THE ZONE SHALL INDEX BACK TO UNOCCUPIED WHEN OCCUPANCY IS NOT SENSED FOR A PERIOD OF 30 MINUTES. FOR ZONES WITH MULTIPLE SPACES, AN OCCUPANCY SENSOR SHALL BE PROVIDED IN EACH SPACE, AND ZONE OCCUPANCY SHALL BE BASED ON OCCUPANCY INPUTS FROM ANY OF THE SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS ASSOCIATED WITH THAT ZONE. ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND A SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSOR. FOR ZONES WITH MULTIPLE SPACES, ZONE TEMPERATURE SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON AN AVERAGE OF ALL SPACE TEMPERATURES ASSOCIATED WITH THE ZONE. OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE ZONE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED SET POINT, THE VAV DAMPER SHALL MODULATE TOWARD THE MINIMUM POSITION AND ON FURTHER DEMAND FOR HEATING THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE SET POINT. WHEN THE COIL VALVE IS FULLY OPEN AND THERE IS FURTHER DEMAND FOR HEAT, THE VAV CONTROLLER SHALL REVERSE SEQUENCE TO ALLOW THE UNIT DAMPER TO OPEN AS REQUIRED TO SUPPLY MORE WARM AIR TO THE ZONE. OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE ZONE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED SET POINT, THE REHEAT COIL VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED AND THE VAV DAMPER SHALL MODULATE TOWARD THE OPEN POSITION AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE SET POINT. UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE ZONE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED SET POINT, THE VAV DAMPER SHALL MODULATE TOWARD THE MINIMUM POSITION, AND ON FURTHER DEMAND THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE SET POINT. WHEN THE COIL VALVE IS FULLY OPEN AND THERE IS FURTHER DEMAND FOR HEAT, THE VAV CONTROLLER SHALL REVERSE SEQUENCE TO ALLOW THE UNIT DAMPER TO OPEN AS REQUIRED TO SUPPLY MORE WARM AIR TO THE ZONE. UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE ZONE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED SET POINT, THE REHEAT COIL VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED AND THE VAV DAMPER SHALL MODULATE TOWARD THE OPEN POSITION AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE SET POINT. IF THE SPACE BECOMES OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX TO OCCUPIED MODE FOR THE DURATION OF OCCUPANCY. OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD THEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT WILL CHANGE TO THE OCCUPIED SETBACK SETPOINT FOR HEATING OR COOLING. d T sa OS HWS F.L. FIN RADIATION TO OTHER ROOMS ON ZONE COMMOD BACnet / ARCNET OR BACnet / MSTP REHEAT COIL T TO OTHER ROOMS ON ZONE COMMOD BACnet / ARCNET OR BACnet / MSTP TO AHU FROM AHU WHERE EXISTING OR PROVIDED BY DIV. 26 FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 M701 CONTROL SCHEMATICS 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 TAM CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M701 1Baseboard Heating And Variable Air Volume Cooling Zone Control DESCRIPTION HARDWARE POINTSSOFTWARE POINTS SHOW ON GRAPHICNOTES BIBOAIAOAVBVSCH TREN D ALARM BACS/DDCDESCRIPTION SUPPLY VAV DAMPER POSITION COMMANDXXX RETURN VAV DAMPER POSITION COMMANDXXX SUPPLY VAV AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM)XXX10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT XBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT COIL TEMPERATURE RISE DEG FXXX5 DEG F TEMPERATURE RISE WHEN HEATING VALVE IS COMMANDED CLOSED XBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT RETURN VAV AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM)XXX10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT XBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT ZONE TEMPERATURE SETPOINTXXX SUPPLY VAV AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM)XXXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT RETURN VAV AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM)XXXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT ZONE TEMPERATUREXXX± 4°F FROM SETPOINTX SUPPLY VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%)XXXVALVE COMMAND ≠ FEEDBACKXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT RETURN VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%)XXXVALVE COMMAND ≠ FEEDBACKXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT HEATING COIL VALVE POSITION COMMANDXXXX LEAVING AIR TEMPERATUREXXX BASEBOARD RADIATION CONTROL VALVE POSITION COMMAND XXXFAIL LAST ZONE OCCUPANCYXXX #Description Date DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES: EXISTING WALL MOUNTED RECELTAPCLES, DISCONNECTS, DATA PORTS, AND ELECTRICAL FIXTURES TO BE REMOVED . REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CIRCUITING AND RACEWAY BACK TO SOURCE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES IN THE FIELD. LIGHT FIXTURES ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. EXISTING SECURITY SYSTEM CONTROL BOX TO BE REMOVED AND RETURNED TO OWNER. ALTERNATE #2 EXISTING SECURITY SYSTEM CONTROL BOX TO BE MOVED TO COMMUNICATIONS ROOM 105C. 1 2 3 4 FIVE RECPETACLES IN WIREWAY 1 ALTERNATE #2 2 34 A. COORDINATE SCHEDULING OF REMOVAL WORK WITH OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, PHASING DRAWINGS AND REQUIREMENTS. B. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND SCHEDULE OF REMOVAL WORK IN ALL AREAS PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. REFER TO OTHER TRADES DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE REMOVAL WORK WITH OTHER TRADES DIVISION CONTRACTORS PRIOR TO STARTING. C. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL OF ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITHIN SPACES INDICATED. D. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED WIRING AND TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY OF ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, RECEPTACLES, DEVICES, LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN DURING ALL STAGES OF WORK. E. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT FOR ALL EXISTING RACEWAYS AND BRANCH CIRCUITRY TO REMAIN DURING ALL STAGES OF WORK. F. PROTECT ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, RECEPTACLES, DEVICES, LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, SECURITY (CCTV) EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES AND ALL ASSOCIATED RACEWAYS AND BRANCH CIRCUITRY TO REMAIN FROM DAMAGE AND DEBRIS DURING ALL STAGES OF WORK. G. ALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. H. OBTAIN A LIST FROM THE OWNER, OR THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, OF ANY ITEMS THEY WISH TO RETAIN. DISCONNECT, REMOVE, INVENTORY AND DELIVER ALL ITEMS TO OWNER DESIGNATED ON-SITE LOCATION IN GOOD OPERATING ORDER. PROVIDE A TRANSMITTAL OF THE ITEMS INVENTORIED TO THE OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTAIVE. ALL OTHER ITEMS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE PROJECT SITE COMPLETE AND DISPOSED OF IN THE APPROPRIATE MANNER. I. EXISTING CONDUIT AND BRANCH CIRCUTRY LOCATED IN NON-ACCESSIBLE WALLS/FLOORS, JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE ABANDON IN PLACE AS FOLLOWS: • DISCONNECT BRANCH CIRCUIT AT SOURCE. • REMOVE SURFACE AND FLOOR BOX(ES). • PROVIDE PRIMED STEEL BLANK PLATE ON ANY FLUSH OUTLET BOX(ES) TO REMAIN. • CUT BACK RACEWAY SUBS SO AS TO BE RECESSED INTO FLOOR/WALL. • PATCH ALL ANCHOR HOLES FROM REMOVED EQUIPMENT. BOXES, AND RACEWAYS. J.REMOVE AND REPLACE EXISTING DOWLIGHTS AND SWITCHES IN MAP ROOM 1134. G.REMOVE ALL UNUSED IT CABLING BACK TO THE SOURCE. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 ED101 FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 Author CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" ED101 1DEMO FIRST FLOOR PLAN RM 1149 #Description Date ISSUE: DATE: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: SCALE: PROJECT NO. SHEET TITLE SHEET DRAWING NO. ALTERATION OF THIS DOCUMENT EXCEPT BY A LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, IS A VIOLATION OF NEW YORK STATE EDUCATIONAL LAW. OF FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 Enter address here R:\Revit MEP 2012\Templates\S&A_Mechanical.rte 10/5/2011 4:16:29 PM Owner Project Name SK-M2 01/01/2019 Author Checker Project Number Unnamed MARKDATEDESCRIPTION ? ?PLAN DETAIL BUILDING SECTION DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED EXTENT OF DETAIL EXTENT OF DETAIL A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 A4 B4 C4 D4 E4 A5 B5 C5 D5 E5 A6 B6 C6 D6 E6 DETAIL NUMBER DETAIL SCALE DETAIL NAME DETAIL NUMBER PLAN SETUP SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED CAUTION: THESE DOCUMENTS WERE DIGITALLY PRODUCED AND/OR REPRODUCED. CONFIRM REDUCTION OR MAGNIFICATION USING DIMENSIONAL 3"-LONG LINE IN TITLE BARS. IF SCALING DRAWINGS FOR APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS, ALTERNATE ARCHITECTURAL SCALES MAY BE USED AS FOLLOWS: DOCUMENT REDUCTION/MAGNIFICATION SCALE IF LINE MEASURES 2”(67% COPY): USE 3/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 3/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG IF LINE MEASURES 1.5”(50% COPY): USE 1/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 31/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG 3" 3" ? ? ? ?XXX X" = X" NOTES: F S C FINISHED FLOOR 1'-6" 1'-6" 1'-6" DUPLEX RECEPTACLE DESK TOP TELEPHONE DATA OUTLET 2'-0" EXTERIOR DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 4'-0" DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MECH RM LIGHT SWITCH 4'-0" PB GYM DOOR PUSHBUTTON F SEE NOTE 3 FIRE ALARM PULLSTATION WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE/INTERCOM PHONE SEE NOTE 3 F 5'-0" DISCONNECT SWITCH 6'-0" PANELBOARD FIRE ALARM A/V DEVICE FIRE ALARM VISUAL DEVICE SEE NOTE 4 EMERGENCY LIGHT CLOCK INTERCOM SPEAKER SEE NOTE 5 1. IN LOCATIONS WHERE SIMILAR DEVICES ARE MOUNTED AT THE SAME HEIGHT DEVICES SHALL BE PROPERLY "GANGED" AND SHALL HAVE ASINGLE COVER PLATE. 2. IN LOCATIONS WHERE DIFFERENT DEVICES ARE MOUNTED AT DIFFERENT HEIGHTS WITHIN FOUR FEET OF ONE ANOTHER. DEVICES SHALL BE MOUNTED SUCH THAT THEY HAVE A COMMON CENTER LINE. IF THERE ARE THREE OR MORE DEVICES THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST A DETAIL FROM THE ARCHITECT. 3. 42" MINIMUM TO 48" MAXIMUM AND WITHIN 5FT FROM DOOR. 4. 80" OR, AT SHALLOW CEILING INSTALLATIONS, WITHIN 6" OF FINISHED CEILING. VERIFY WITH ENGINEER. 5. 90" AFF, OR, AT SHALLOW CEILING INSTALLATIONS, TOP OF UNIT WITHIN 6" OF FINISHED CEILING. SEE NOTE 3 A.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF BASE BID NEW CONSTRUCTION AND RENOVATED AREAS, PHASING REQUIREMENTS AND ALTERNATES. PROVIDE MATERIALS AND LABOR FOR COMPLETE, FUNCTIONAL SYSTEMS. COORDINATE WIRING AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, CONDUCTORS, WIRING DEVICES, ETC. SHALL BE NEW AND UL-LISTED, SUITABLE FOR LOCATION AND FUNCTION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND RACEWAY PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AND ELEVATIONS. PROVIDE TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING. PROVIDE TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY AND CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN SERVICES. VERIFY SCOPE AND PHASING OF DEMOLITION WORK FOR AREAS TO BE ABATED AND RENOVATED. PROTECT EXISTING CIRCUITRY SERVING ADJACENT AREA/EQUIPMENT WHICH WILL REMAIN IN USE. PROVIDE SUPPORT AND TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS/RE-ROUTING AS REQUIRED. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS INDICATING REMOVAL SCOPE OF WORK. CONTRACTOR FOR DIVISION 26 SHALL DISCONNECT AND REMOVE BRANCH CIRCUITRY, LIGHT FIXTURES, WIRING DEVICES, CLOCKS, SPEAKERS, TELEPHONES AND RESPECTIVE SYSTEM WIRING/CABLING COMPLETE. REMOVALS SHALL INCLUDE ALL ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS IN/ON WALLS THAT ARE TO BE REMOVED. MAINTAIN CIRCUITRY TO EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN. FIRE STOP PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS AND FLOORS WITH FIRE STOP MATERIAL EQUAL IN RATING TO THE CONSTRUCTION OF WHICH IT IS PENETRATING. SOUND TRANSFERENCE: FLUSH WALL MOUNTED ELECTRICAL BOXES MOUNTED IN COMMON WALLS BETWEEN ADJACENT ROOMS, SHALL BE INSTALLED INDEPENDENT OF EACH OTHER; EACH WITH SEPARATE CONDUIT RISER(S). NIPPLING OF FLUSH WALL MOUNTED ELECTRICAL BOXES NOT ALLOWED. WHERE ELECTRICAL BOXES ARE MOUNTED BACK TO BACK, PROVIDE INSULATION BETWEEN BOXES. GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS 1.ALL GROUNDING SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH NEC ARTICLES 250. 2.ALL INSULATED GROUND CONDUCTORS SHALL BE GREEN. PROVIDE EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR FOR EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT. 3.PROVIDE GROUNDING PER EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS: 1.VARIOUS PIECES OF EQUIPMENT WILL BE FURNISHED TO THE PROJECT SITE AND INSTALLED BY OTHER DIVISIONS. 2.PROVIDE ROUGHING-IN AND FINAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 3.BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK, OBTAIN FULL INFORMATION REGARDING ROUGH-IN MEASUREMENTS, EQUIPMENT LAYOUTS, ELEVATIONS, TRIM BEING FURNISHED, AND OTHER NECESSARY DATA. 4.UPON REQUEST, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER WILL PROVIDE THIS DIVISION WITH DIAGRAMS, PHOTOGRAPHS, DRAWINGS, AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER COMPLETE DESCRIPTIVE DATA. DO NOT ROUGH WITHOUT APPROVED LAYOUT FROM CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. 5.PROVIDE ACCESSORIES SO THAT CONNECTIONS MAY BE MADE IN A MANNER THAT SHALL MEET ALL REGULATIONS AND CODES. 6.SEE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS DIVISION'S SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIALS AND METHODS. USE OF SHALLOW FLUSH MOUNT ELECTRICAL BOXES SHALL BE PERMITTED WHERE DEPTH OF WALL CAVITY/FURRING IS LESS THAN 2 1/2" AS INDICATED ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. CONCEAL ALL ADDED CONDUITS, EXPOSED CONDUIT INSTALLATION IS UNACCEPTABLE UNLESS PRIOR APPROVAL IS GIVEN BY ARCHITECT. ANY EXPOSED CONDUIT INSTALLATION SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL FINISH. REFER TO T SERIES AV DRAWINGS AND COORIDINATE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. B. GENERAL NOTES C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. J. X1 X2EXIT SIGN LIGHT FIXTURE WITH CONNECTION TO EMERGENCY POWER. COORDINATE TYPE AND MOUNTING. PROVIDE ARROWS WHERE INDICATED. DESCRIPTION SYMBOL LIGHTING SYMBOLS DLED LIGHT FIXTURE, SUBSCRIPT D = FIXTURE TYPE, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE. EMT VFC AFF AC G NF GFGROUND FAULT INTERUPT DEVICE NON-FUSED GROUND ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER ABOVE COUNTER -6"ABOVE COUNTERTOP OR BACKSPLASH ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING EWCELECTRIC WATER COOLER ED1 3 aS NIGHT LIGHT NL AT UNIT AU FIRE SMOKE DAMPER. PROVIDE CONNECTIONS AS INDICATED FS OS1 PC PANELBOARD, 208/120V - SURFACE MOUNTED BRANCH CIRCUIT HOMERUN: 2 #12, 1 #12G, 1/2"C TO PANELBOARD CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. B1 / 12 = PANEL NAME / CIRCUIT NUMBER DESCRIPTION SYMBOL ABBREVIATIONS PHOTOCELL. WALL MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR, 1 = TYPE, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. WALL SWITCH, 3 = THREEWAY, a = FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE MARKED SAME. CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR, 3 = TYPE, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. SYMBOL GENERAL SYMBOLS REFERS TO KEYED DEMOLITION NOTE ON RESPECTIVE DRAWING DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH SYMBOL SECONDARY SERVICE SYMBOLS PANELBOARD, 208/120V - RECESSED MOUNTED MOTOR CONNECTION. EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITRY AS INDICATED ON PLANS AND KEYED TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE OR AS OTHERWISE NOTED. S F F F FIRE ALARM CONNECTION. SUBSCRIPT IDENTIFIES TYPE: FS -FIRE SMOKE DAMPER CONNECTION FA -FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWN OF EQUIPMENT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL SYMBOL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) FIRE ALARM SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM THERMAL DETECTOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MANUAL PULL STATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTOR, DUCT MOUNT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMBINATION VISUAL AND AUDIBLE INDICATING DEVICE, WALL MOUNTED. STROBE INTENSITY 75 CANDELAS, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. SUBSCRIPTS: WP -WEATHERPROOF, WG -WIREGUARD FIRE ALARM SYSTEM VISUAL (ONLY) INDICATING APPLIANCE, WALL MOUNTED, INTENSITY 75 CANDELA UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE FACP FAA FS WP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -BEAM DETECTOR TYPE, TRANSMITTER TR BR DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, WALL MOUNTED / ABOVE COUNTER MOUNTED AC G.F.C.I. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, WALL MOUNTED / ABOVE COUNTER MOUNTED GF/AC GF DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, WALL MOUNTED / ABOVE COUNTER MOUNTED AC WEATHERPROOF DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET WP FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET IG SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE OUTLET, NEMA CONFIGURATION TO MATCH PLUG BRANCH CIRCUITRY: 2 #12, 1 #12G, 1/2"C UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED B1/12 F FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMBINATION VISUAL AND AUDIBLE INDICATING DEVICE, CEILING MOUNTED. STROBE INTENSITY 75 CANDELAS, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. SUBSCRIPTS: WP -WEATHERPROOF, WG -WIREGUARD FIRE ALARM SYSTEM VISUAL (ONLY) INDICATING APPLIANCE, CEILING MOUNTED, INTENSITY 75 CANDELA UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE F DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, SURACE MOUNTED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -BEAM DETECTOR TYPE, RECEIVER S S DEVICE SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION SYMBOL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH FS FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH TS DSD 4 PORT (QUAD) USB CHARGER OUTLET WAP DESCRIPTION SYMBOL VOICE/DATA SYMBOLS DATA OUTLET, WALL MOUNTED (2) CAT 6 CABLES / (2) RJ-45 JACKS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE TYPE WAP (WIRELESS ACESS POINT) DATA OUTLET, CEILING MOUNTED (1) CAT 6A CABLE / (1) RJ-45 JACK WALL PHONE -(1) CAT 6 CABLE / (1) RJ-45 JACK E1REFERS TO KEYED NOTE ON RESPECTIVE DRAWING HP-012 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MAGNETIC DOOR HOLD OPEN ETREXISTING TO REMAIN 3 OS S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTOR, ELEVATOR RECALL R JJUNCTION BOX AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH ATS PANELBOARD, 480/277V - SURFACE MOUNTED PANELBOARD, 480/277V - RECESSED MOUNTED DIMMER SWITCH J MS -CEILING MOUNTED, FLUSH, DOUBLE-GANG JUNCTION BOX FOR MOTORIZED SCREEN. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH AV CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT. XX DATA OUTLET FOR AV EQUIPMENT, WALL MOUNTED AT 18" AFF, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE (4) CAT 6 CABLES / (4) RJ-45 JACKS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE AV/4 SS -WALL MOUNTED, FLUSH, SINGLE-GANG JUNCTION BOX FOR PROJECTOR SCREEN SWITCH. MOUNT AT 45" AFF COORDINATE LOCATION WITH AV CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT. DATA OUTLET FOR AV EQUIPMENT, WALL MOUNTED AT 78" AFF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE (2) CAT 6 CABLES / (2) RJ-45 JACKS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE AV/2 AL -ASSISTIVE LISTENING TRANSMITTER AV -AUDIO VISUAL INTERFACE FP -FLAT PANEL DISPLAY PB -AV PANEL BOX CP -CONTROL PANEL SCEILING MOUNTED SPEAKER. WIREMOLD FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 E001 DRAWING INDEX, SCHEDULES, SYMBOL LISTS & NOTES 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 ASC/JLR CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive ELECTRICAL DRAWING INDEX NUMBERNAME REVISIONS #DATE ED101FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E001DRAWING INDEX, SCHEDULES, SYMBOL LISTS & NOTES E101FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN E102SECOND & THIRD FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEER'S PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT, THE DESIGN OF THIS PROJECT CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: THE 2020 NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM FIRE PREVENTION AND BUILDING CODE THE 2020 NEW YORK STATE ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE FOLLOWING THE COMPLIANCE PATH MARKED BELOW: ANSI / ASHRAE / IESNA 90.1 IECC CHAPTER 4 [CE] PRESCRIPTIVE PROVISIONS (SECTIONS C402, C403, C404, C405, AND ONE OF THE SIX OPTIONS IN SECTION C406 AS NOTED BELOW: MORE EFFICIENT HVAC PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.2. REDUCED LIGHTING POWER DENSITY SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.3. ENHANCED LIGHTING CONTROL IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.4. ON-SITE SUPPLY OF RENEWABLE ENERGY IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.5. PROVISION OF A DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM FOR CERTAIN HVAC EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.6. HIGH-EFFICIENCY SERVICE WATER HEATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.7. TOTAL BUILDING PERFORMANCE PROVISIONS (SECTION C407) THE BUILDING STANDARD OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION DEPARTMENT THE 2014 FGI GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF HOSPITALS AND OUTPATIENT FACILITIES ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED SCALE: NOT TO SCALE E001 A3DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS #Description Date s s OS2 95" AFF 95" AFF 95" AFF ASSISTED LEARNING TRANSMITTER 3 L1LG/1 EX. PANEL L1LG MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM 1149 MICROSCOPE TABLE 4 L1LG/2 L1LG/3 L1LG/4 L1LG/7 L1LG/6 L1LG/5 L1LG/8 56 7 A. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF RECEPTACLES & DATA OUTLETS WITH ARCHITECT, ARCHITECT'S ELEVATION DRAWINGS, AV CONSULTANT AND TASERIES DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. B. PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL AND GROUND CONDUCTOR FOR EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT INDICATED. C. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF LIGHT FIXTURES WITH ARCHITECT AND ARCHITECT'S REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND ELEVATION DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. D. CIRCUIT LIGHT FIXTURES TOGETHER WITH 2#10, #10E.G. -1/2" CONDUIT, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. E. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AT ROOMS/LOCATIONS WHERE DIMMING SWITCHES ARE INDICATED PROVIDE 0-10V DIMMING / LIGHTING CONTROL. COORDINATE THE 0-10V DIMMING CONTROL WITH THE 0-10V LED DRIVERS AT LIGHT FIXTURES. F. NEW CABLING WILL ROUTE TO EXISTING CIT INFRASTRUCTURE. G. EXISTING CABLE TRAYS AND PULLBOXES SHALL REMAIN ACCESSIBLE. H.WALL SPEAKER SPEAKERS AND ASSISTED LEARNING TRANSMITTER TO BE CONTROLLED FROM WALL MOUNTED DEVICE BEHIND INSTRUCTOR'S DESK. WIRING SHOULD INCASED IN RACEWAY. GENERAL NOTES KEYED NOTES REVISE EXISTING WIRING FOR EXISTING FRONT ROW LIGHT FIXTURES CLOSEST TO WESTERN WALL. ADD LIGHT SWITCH FOR SEPERATE CONTROL OF FRONT ROW LIGHT FIXTURES TO MATCH ZONES AS INDICATED. (Z#) PROVIDE WIRING AND CONNECTIONS FOR POWER AND DATA OUTLETS AT EACH DESK. PROVIDE RECEPTACLE AND DATA DROP FOR CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR. PROVIDE AV CABLE PATH BETWEEN INSTRUCTOR'S TABLE AND CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR. DESK POWER AND DATA WILL BE FED FROM WALL MOUNTED SURFACE RACEWAY. PROVIDE DATA CONNECTION FOR FUTURE DOOR SECURITY CONTROL. REMOVE AND REPLACE POWER WIRING AND DATA CABLING FOR EXISTING DISPLAY CABINETS SOUTH OF ROOM 1149. COORDINATE WITH SNEE BUILDING MANAGER. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM 1149 1 EX. PANEL L1LG Z1 Z1 Z2Z2Z2Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z1Z2Z2Z2Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z1 Z1 3 3 Z1 Z2 FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 E101 FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN 05/01/2021 11614/ COB #2013 ASC/JLR CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation 112 Hollister Drive 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E101 11149 POWER & SYSTEMS PLAN 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E101 31149 LIGHTING PLAN #Description Date ELECTRICAL & TELECOM SYMBOLS WALL MOUNTED CEILING MOUNTED FLOOR MOUNTED DESCRIPTION AC DUPLEX OUTLET AC QUAD OUTLET DIRECT POWER CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT NETWORK DATA JACK - COPPER (# OF JACKS) NETWORK DATA JACK - FIBER (# OF JACKS) TELEPHONE JACK (# OF JACKS) NETWORK DATA/TELEPHONE COMBO JACK (# OF JACKS) CABLE TELEVISION JACK JUNCTION BOX INDEX OF DRAWINGS DRAWING # DRAWING NAME TA001 COVER SHEET TA101 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA102 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA501 DETAILS & SCHEDULES TA701 AV SYSTEM DESIGN ABBREVIATIONS AFC ABOVE FINISHED CEILING LVC LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLER AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR NIC NOT IN CONTRACT AVC AUDIO VISUAL CONTRACTOR NTS NOT TO SCALE EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR OFE OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT EQ EQUAL RCP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FB FLOOR BOX REV REVISION GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR SPEC SPECIFICATION HVAC HEATING & COOLING SYSTEMS SPKR SPEAKER IR INFRARED TB TABLE BOX IWE INCLUDED WITH EQUIPMENT TBD TO BE DETERMINED J JUNCTION BOX TYP TYPICAL KO KNOCK OUT VIF VERIFY IN FIELD LV LOW VOLTAGE WB WALL BOX LVC LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLER CONNECTORS 1/4"B 1/4" TIP-RING-SLEEVE BALANCED PHNX PHOENIX (CAPTIVE SCREW) 1/4"U 1/4" TIP-SLEEVE UNBALANCED RCA RCA 3.5MM 3.5MM STEREO AUDIO RJ45 UNSHIELDED RJ45 DB9 9-PIN DSUB SERIAL SRJ45 SHIELDED RJ45 DP DISPLAY PORT TB THUNDERBOLT DVI-A DVI DIGITAL TERM TERMINAL BLOCK DVI-D DVI DIGITAL USB-A USB STANDARD TYPE A FCON F-TYPE COAX USB-B USB STANDARD TYPE B HDMI HDMI USB-C USB STANDARD TYPE C IEC IEC POWER VGA 15-PIN DSUB VGA IR INFRARED EMITTER VISCA SONY VISCA 8-PIN MINI-DIN MDP MINI DISPLAY PORT XLR XLR GENERAL NOTES & SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL SIZE, DIMENSION AND LOCATION INFORMATION MUST BE VERIFIED ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. IF VALUES CONFLICT, CONTACT OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR CLARIFICATION. 2. ALL BACK BOX, OUTLET AND SWITCH MEASUREMENTS ARE SPECIFIED AND DRAWN TO VERTICAL CENTER, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. FLUSH MOUNTED OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH COVERS WHICH OVERLAP BOX SIDES BY 3/4" TO COVER ROUGH OPENING IN FINISHED WALL. SURFACE MOUNTED BOXES SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH COVERS OF THE SAME SIZE AS BOX. 4. CONSTRUCTION WORK SHOWN IN THESE DRAWINGS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE G.C. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. QUANTITIES SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE CONFIRMED BY EACH DISCIPLINE. DISCREPANCIES SHOULD BE REFERRED TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 6. ALL WALL MOUNTED DEVICES SHALL HAVE 3/4" PLYWOOD WALL BLOCKING (PROVIDED BY GC) SPANNING THE WALL MOUNTING BRACKET. ELECTRICAL & TELECOM NOTES 1. ALL CABLE PATH, CIRCUIT, ROUTING AND LOCATION INFORMATION MUST BE VERIFIED ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. IF VALUES CONFLICT, CONTACT OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR CLARIFICATION. 2. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL ABIDE BY NATIONAL AND LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODE. IF CODES CONFLICT, THE STRICTER OF THE TWO SHALL BE FOLLOWED. 3. G.C. SHALL PROVIDE ALL CONDUIT, PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, BOX COVERS, LOW VOLTAGE CUT-IN RINGS, J-HOOKS, BRIDLE RINGS, FLOOR BOXES, PLATES, PANELS, ENCLOSURES, POWER CIRCUITS, POWER CABLE AND POWER CONNECTIONS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CUSTOM AV PANELS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE A.V.C., UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. AC OUTLETS AND DATA/TELECOM JACKS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE FOR AV PURPOSES. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR OTHER AC AND DATA/TELECOM NEEDS. 4. ALL LOW VOLTAGE AV RELATED DATA CABLES EXPOSED IN PLENUM SPACES MUST BE PLENUM RATED CABLE. 5. VERIFY FLOOR BOX LOCATION AND CONTENTS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. LOCATIONS MAY CHANGE FROM ORIGINAL DRAWINGS BASED ON FINALIZED FURNITURE LAYOUTS. 6. ALL CIRCUITS POWERING AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE DERIVED FROM THE SAME ELECTRICAL PHASE, BE DEDICATED STRICTLY TO AV DEVICES, HAVE ISOLATED GROUNDS TERMINATING AT A SINGLE POINT IN THE ASSOCIATED SUBPANEL, AND BE PROTECTED BY 20 AMP BREAKERS PER CIRCUIT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS POWERING AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE RUN IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO OR SHARE CIRCUITS POWERING MOTORIZED EQUIPMENT, LIGHTING SYSTEM DIMMERS OR ANY OTHER INDUCTIVE ELECTRICAL LOADS. 8. CONDUIT ROUTING TO BE COORDINATED & APPROVED ON SITE BY THE AUDIO VISUAL CONTRACTOR. 9. CONDUIT PULL BOXES SHALL BE PLACED AFTER 180 DEGREES OF BENDS AND/OR EVERY 100 FEET. 10. CONDUIT MATERIAL SHALL BE EMT STEEL CONDUIT (NOT FLEXIBLE, PVC OR ALUMINUM), ENDS SHALL BE FITTED WITH INSULATED BUSHINGS AND PULL STRING LEFT IN ALL CONDUIT. 11. CONDUIT CONTAINING AUDIO VISUAL CABLING SHALL NOT CONTAIN POWER OR DATA CABLING. AV SIGNAL CONDUIT SHALL BE SEPARATED FROM CONDUIT CONTAINING POWER CABLING BY AT LEAST 12". POWER CONDUIT MUST CROSS AV SIGNAL CONDUIT AT 90 DEGREE ANGLES. 12. BEND RADIUS FOR CONDUIT SIZED 2" OR LESS SHALL BE NO LESS THAN 6 TIMES THE INTERNAL DIAMETER. CONDUIT SIZED LARGER THAN 2" SHALL HAVE A BEND RADIUS NO LESS THAN 10 TIMES THE INTERNAL DIAMETER. 13. ALL FREE-AIR CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SHALL BE IN J-HOOKS SECURED TO THE HARD DECK CEILING, WITH NO MORE THAN 60" SPACING BETWEEN HANGERS. HVAC NOTES 1. HVAC SUPPLY VENTS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN THE CEILING BETWEEN THE PROJECTOR AND PROJECTION SCREEN TO PREVENT THERMAL ARTIFACTS IN PROJECTED IMAGE. 2. HVAC VENTS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED NEXT TO HANGING (WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED) PROJECTION SCREENS TO PREVENT SCREEN MOVEMENT. AUDIO VISUAL INSTALLATION NOTES 1. ALL AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT, CABLING, DEVICE MOUNTING AND TERMINATIONS SHOWN IN THESE DRAWINGS WILL BE PROVIDED BY THE AUDIO VISUAL CONTRACTOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. ALL LOW VOLTAGE AV CABLES EXPOSED IN PLENUM SPACES MUST BE PLENUM RATED CABLE. 5. ALL CABLES SHALL BE LABELED ON EACH END WITH WIRE ID #, AND SIGNAL SOURCE/DESTINATION. 6. ALL CONNECTION PLATE JACKS SHALL BE LABELED WITH ENGRAVING OR PRINTED LABELS. 7. RJ45 CONNECTORS SHALL BE TERMINATED USING THE T568B WIRING STANDARD. 8. VELCRO STRIPS SHALL BE USED TO SECURE CATX CABLES, NOT PLASTIC ZIP TIES. 9. POWER AND AV SIGNAL CABLES SHALL BE ROUTED ON SEPARATE SIDES OF THE EQUIPMENT RACK. RACK CABLING SHALL INCLUDE SERVICE LOOPS FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND SERVICING. 10. ALL AV DEVICES INSTALLED ON WALLS OR CEILING SHALL BE SECURED TO STRUCTURAL BLOCKING OR HARD DECK CEILING WITH SAFETY TETHERS. 11. SPEAKER GRILL PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS: FOLLOW MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS, REMOVE GRILLS FROM SPEAKERS, USE ROLLERS OR BRUSHES (NOT SPRAYERS), AND CHECK THAT GRILL HOLES ARE NOT CLOGGED WITH PAINT. TVTV TV JJ J F F F DRAWING SYMBOLS DETAIL INDICATOR ELEVATION INDICATOR KEYNOTE 01 AV201 01 AV501 01 HEIGHT AFF (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) AV EQUIPMENT SYMBOLS SYMBOL EQUIPMENT NAME EQUIPMENT MOUNTING BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD PLATE NOTES ASSISTIVE LISTENING TRANSMITTER WALL 1-GANG 2" SURFACE MOUNTED ON FINISHED WALL LISTEN LA-347 DEVICE MOUNTED TO BOX PLATE CONTROL PANEL TABLE SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA501 CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE PROJECTOR CEILING SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA501 PROJECTOR SCHEDULE PROJECTION SCREEN WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA501 PROJ. SCREEN SCHEDULE SPEAKER WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA501 SPEAKER SCHEDULE XXX#18" SPEAKER ZONE NUMBER TYPE (REFER TO TA60x SCHEDULES) EQUIPMENT SYMBOL AL CPX P X S X# AV EQUIPMENT SYMBOLS KEY PSX RESPONSIBILITY CHART FURNISHED BY: INSTALLED BY: A.V.C. G.C. E.C. FURNITURE OWNER OTHER EXISTING A.V.C. G.C. E.C. FURNITURE OWNER OTHER EXISTING CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PROJECTOR PROJECTOR CEILING MOUNTING PLATE & PIPE PROJECTOR CEILING PIPE MOUNTED BOX PROJECTOR CEILING MOUNTING STRUCTURE (UNISTRUT) PROJECTOR MOUNTING BRACKET WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PROJECTION SCREEN & MOUNTING BRACKETS PROJECTION SCREEN WALL BLOCKING WALL SPEAKERS ASSISTIVE LISTENING TRANSMITTER AV DEVICES CONTROL BUTTON PANEL HDMI EXTENDER AV NETWORK SWITCH WIRELESS MICROPHONE AUDIO DEVICES (DSP, AMPLIFIER) CABLES LOW VOLTAGE AV CABLES AV CONNECTORS ELECTRICAL & CABLE PATH AC POWER OUTLETS NETWORK DATA JACKS BACK BOXES/J-BOXES/LV CUT-IN RINGS/FACEPLATES J-HOOKS/CABLE HANGERS CONDUITS, RACEWAY, PULL STRINGS & PULL BOXES PROGRAMMING AV CONTROL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AUDIO DSP PROGRAMMING DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation MT THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR REFERENCE ONLY 112 Hollister Drive TA001 COVER SHEET PS A99" 01 TA501 S A95" S A95" CP A 03 TA101 AL 95" PROJECTED IMAGE (SEE RCP ON TA101 DETAIL 2) (2)18" 18" 50"X80" (94" DIAGONAL) PROJECTION SCREEN TYPE A WITH WALL BRACKETS (BY GC) SECURED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE (CMU WALL). COORDINATE HEIGHT OF MOUNTING BRACKETS IN FIELD TO ASSURE THAT THE TOP EDGE OF SCREEN CASE IS TIGHT TO EXISTING LIGHTS. SEE TA501 DETAIL 01. WALL SPEAKER TYPE A (BY AVC) SURFACE MOUNTED. TYPICAL OF 2. 163" 137" BOTTOM OF PROJECTED IMAGE AFF: 42" SPEAKER AFF: 95" SCREEN WALL BRACKETS AFF (COORDINATE IN FIELD): 99" ASSISTIVE LISTENING AFF: 95" ASSISTIVE LISTENING IR TRANSMITTER (BY AVC) SURFACE MOUNTED OVER 1-GANG J-BOX (BY EC). 10" 12" BOTTOM OF PROJECTOR AFF: 90" EXISTING HANGING LIGHT FIXTURES PROJECTOR CEILING MOUNTING METHOD TBD IN FIELD BASED ON EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS. SEE TA501 DETAIL 02. SEE TA501 DETAIL 01 FOR SCREEN MOUNTING DETAIL 154" TABLES SHOWN AT 30" AFF FOR REFERENCE ONLY. SEE ARCHITECTURAL/ FURNITURE DRAWINGS. 100" 1149 MICROSCOPY CLASSROOM PROJECTOR LENS TO SCREEN THROW: 141" (2) 02 TA501 P A CENTER OF PROJECTOR CEILING MOUNT FROM SOUTH WALL: 163" CENTER OF PROJECTOR CEILING MOUNT FROM WEST WALL: 154" DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation MT THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR REFERENCE ONLY 112 Hollister Drive TA101 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN 01 SNEE 1149 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN EQUIPMENT LAYOUT - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 03 SNEE 1149 WEST WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 04 SNEE 1149 SECTION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 02 SNEE 1149 ENLARGED CEILING PLAN EQUIPMENT LAYOUT - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" S WALL SPEAKER P PROJECTOR FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR SNEE HALL 1149 3/4" AL ASSISTIVE LISTENING TRANSMITTER 3/4" S WALL SPEAKER RACEWAY TO STUB ON CEILING NEXT TO PROJECTOR MOUNTING LOCATION RACEWAY TO STUB AT 18" AFF ADJACENT TO POWER/DATA ON SOUTH WALL NEXT TO INSTRUCTOR'S TABLE 1/2"1/2" 1" RACEWAY TO STUB AT SPEAKER LOCATIONS 95" AFF (NO J-BOX) ON WEST WALL. TYPICAL OF 2. SNEE HALL 1149 DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation MT THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR REFERENCE ONLY 112 Hollister Drive TA102 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN RACEWAY RISER NOTES 1) ELECTRICAL AND NETWORK DATA CONDUIT AND PULL-BOXES TO BE SPECIFIED BY OTHERS. IF SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING, THEY ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 2) THIS DRAWING DOES NOT INDICATE EXACT JUNCTION BOX LOCATIONS OR EXACT RACEWAY ROUTING. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION, ROUTING, AND FINISH WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND AV CONTRACTOR IN FIELD. 3) " T " INDICATES RACEWAY STUB, RATHER THAN TERMINATION AT A J-BOX. 01 SNEE 1149 RACEWAY RISER - AV SCALE: NTS SECTION TOP HARD DECK CEILING 24" X 1 5/8" X 1 5/8" SLOTTED CHANNEL ANCHORED TO HARD DECK ABLE TO HOLD GROSS WEIGHT OF PROJECTOR AND MOUNT ASSEMBLY PER MANUFACTURER CUT SHEETS PLUS SAFETY FACTOR OF FIVE. PROVIDED BY GC. COORDINATE IN FIELD TO EXTEND THREADED ROD TO TRAPEZE AROUND EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS. (TYP. OF 2) 24" X 1 5/8" X 1 5/8" SLOTTED CHANNEL (PROVIDED BY GC) (TYP. OF 2) CHIEF CMA115W CEILING PLATE (PROVIDED BY AVC) 1 1/2" NPT THREADED PIPE (COLOR: WHITE) LENGTH TBD IN FIELD (PROVIDED BY AVC) 120V 20A DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS (BY EC) NIGEL B NB-PEBPM PIPE STORAGE BOX (BY AVC) PAINTED WHITE (BY AVC). NO POWER RUN TO TO BOX. USE POWER STRIP (BY AVC) IN PIPE BOX TO CEILING MOUNTED POWER OUTLET. WIRELESS MIC RECEIVER SECURED TO TOP OF BOX (BY AVC). 120V 20A DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS (BY EC) WALL BRACKETS SECURED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE (CMU WALL) BY GC. ABLE TO HOLD GROSS WEIGHT OF SCREEN & MOUNTING BRACKETS PER MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS, PLUS SAFETY FACTOR OF FIVE. SCREEN DROP FROM WALL CLEARANCE: 3 7/8". ADDITIONAL SURFACE MOUNTED BLOCKING (BY GC) MAY BE NEEDED TO CLEAR CHALK/MARKER TRAYS, ETC. BUILDING STRUCTURE (CMU WALL) FINISHED WALL ELEVATIONSECTION CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE TYPE STYLE PANEL MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH DATA A BUTTON PANEL CRESTRON MPC3-101-B EXTRON 70-1097-01 TABLETOP KIT & 70-1160-12 TABLE CLAMP NO J-BOX NEEDED (TABLETOP KIT) NA NONE PROJECTOR SCHEDULE TYPE DESCIPTION PROJECTOR MOUNTING PROJECTOR MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL EQUIPMENT STORAGE BOX MAKE & MODEL BLOCKING / SUPPORT BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH POWER DATA/VOICE A CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR CEILING EPSON L610U CHIEF CMA330 NIGEL B DESIGN NB-PEBPM-W PIPE MOUNTED SEE TA501 DETAIL NONE NA 120V 20A DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ATTACHED TO HARD DECK CEILING (2) DATA JACKS ATTACHED TO HARD DECK CEILING SPEAKER SCHEDULE TYPE DESCIPTION SPEAKER MOUNTING SPEAKER MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL BLOCKING / SUPPORT BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH PLATE POWER A WALL SPEAKER SURFACEMOUNTED TO WALL JBL CONTROL 25-1-WH INCLUDED WITH SPEAKER NONE NONE (RACEWAY STUBS AT SPEAKER LOCATIONS) NA NA NONE PROJECTION SCREEN SCHEDULE TYPE DESCIPTION SCREEN MOUNTING SCREEN MAKE & MODEL CASE FINISH CUSTOM DROP MOUNTING BRACKET MAKE & MODEL BLOCKING / SUPPORT BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH POWER LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLER LOCATION A WALL MOUNTED MANUAL PULL-DOWN WALL DA-LITE MODEL C WITH CSR 34726 WHITE STANDARD 2" BLACK DROP DA-LITE 40932 SEE TA501 DETAIL NO J-BOX NEEDED NA NONE (MANUAL PULL-DOWN SCREEN) NA DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation MT THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR REFERENCE ONLY 112 Hollister Drive 01 PROJECTION SCREEN WALL MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: NTS 02 PROJECTOR CEILING MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: NTS TA501 DETAILS & SCHEDULES AV 01 SNEE 1149 CLASSROOM VIDEO/AUDIO/CONTROL SLD SCALE: NO SCALE CRESTRON HD-TX-101-C-E HDMI EXTENDER TRANSMITTER HDMI IN TO RX SRJ45 CRESTRON HD-RX-101-C-E HDMI EXTENDER RECEIVER FROM TXSRJ45 HDMI OUT HDMI EPSON L610U PROJECTOR HDMI IN 1HDMI HDMI IN 2 COMPUTER IN 1 AUDIO IN 1 HDBASET RS-232 LANRJ45 AUDIO OUT 3.5MM MONITOR OUT JBL CONTROL 25-1 WALL SPEAKER 8-OHM TAP INPHNX OUT JBL CONTROL 25-1 WALL SPEAKER 8-OHM TAP INPHNX OUT LISTEN LT-84-01 ASSISTIVE LISTENING IR EMITTER BAL LINE IN 1 UNBAL LINE IN 1RCA MIC IN 1 BAL LINE IN 2 UNBAL LINE IN 2 MIC IN 2 DC POWERPWR LINK OUT A LINK OUT B LISTEN LPT-A117 POWER EXTENDER (REMOTE) EXTRJ45 DC POWER OUT PWRFROM LISTEN POWER SUPPLY LISTEN LPT-A117 POWER EXTENDER (LOCAL) DC POWER INPWR EXT RJ45 CRESTRON CEN-SW-POE-5 POE NETWORK SWITCH PORT 1RJ45 PORT 2 PORT 3 RJ45 PORT 4 RJ45 UPLINK RJ45 INSTRUCTOR TABLE PROJECTOR PIPE BOX CEILING PROJECTOR PIPE BOX WEST WALL CRESTRON MPC3-101-B BUTTON PANEL/CTRL PROCESSOR LAN/POE RJ45 CRESNET IR EXTRON DMP 44 LC DSP INPUT 1PHNX INPUT 2PHNX INPUT 3PHNX INPUT 4 RS-232PHNX DIG CTRL IN 1 DIG CTRL IN 2 DIG CTRL IN 3 OUTPUT 1 PHNX OUTPUT 2 PHNX OUTPUT 3 PHNX OUTPUT 4 EXTRON MPA 152 PLUS AMPLIFIER L INPHNX R INPHNX REMOTE L SPKR OUT PHNX R SPKR OUT PHNX TO CAMPUS LAN WALL JACK SHURE ULXS4 WIRELESS MIC RECEIVER BALANCED OUT XLR PROJECTOR PIPE BOX (ON TOP) CAMPUS LAN CONNECTION TBD BY CORNELL IT 01 CRESTRON CEN-IO-COM-102 RS232 EXPANDER LAN POERJ45 COM 1 PHNX COM 2 01 MOUNTED IN EXTRON 70-1097-01 TABLETOP KIT (BLACK 1-GANG) & 70-1160-12 TABLE CLAMP HDMI CABLE FOR OFE LAPTOP DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM 05/03/2021 11614/ COB #2013 CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Snee Hall 1149 Microscopy Lab Renovation MT THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR REFERENCE ONLY 112 Hollister Drive TA701 AV SYSTEM DESIGN Snee 1149 - Specifications.pdf SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. 1. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. 2. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 6 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 1 SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. A. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 1. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 2 2. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. A. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. 2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 1. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. CMUs: ASTM C 90. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 3 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less-than-nominal dimensions. GROUND-FACED CMU 4. Shape: Solid. 5. Size: Nominal 4 inch wide by 8 inch high by 16 inch long. 6. Score: One vertical center score to create appearance of 8 by 8 block. 7. Ground surface: One face plus one end as required, all exposed surfaces to be ground. 8. Color: Integral, through-body coloring, match architect’s sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that substrates are free of substances that would impair mortar bond. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 TOLERANCES Dimensions and Locations of Elements: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 4 For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 1. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. Lines and Levels: For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch. Joints: For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 8. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. A. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry to match existing bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. B. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 5 C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. E. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 1. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping." 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Rake out mortar joints at pre-faced CMUs to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions. A. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless construction is adjacent to existing construction in which case match existing. B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. A. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 6 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 2. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 3.7 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling. A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04 22 00 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1 SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Plywood panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 3 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Plywood panels. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species. B. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade of any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB. 4. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 4 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD PANELS A. Plywood Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than ¾-inch nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193, or ICCES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 5 1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood panels by fastening to studs or framing. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. I. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 6 J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILERS A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FURRING A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 53 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 13 - 1 SECTION 06 41 13 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: Wood-veneer-faced architectural cabinets. 1. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. 2. Shop finishing of architectural cabinets. Related Requirements: Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 COORDINATION Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Shop Drawings: For architectural cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1. Show large-scale details. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 13 - 2 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural cabinets. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and finish specified, in manufacturer's standard size. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: Lumber for Transparent Finish: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 1. Veneer Leaves: Representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent- finished cabinets. 2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet- work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity at planned levels for building occupants. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 13 - 3 B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET MANUFACTURERS Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume responsibility for production of architectural cabinets with sequence-matched wood veneers. 2.2 CABINETS, GENERAL Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of architectural cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2.3 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. A. Type of Construction: Frameless. B. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: Species: White oak. 1. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn. 2. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 3. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 4. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 13 - 4 Semiexposed Surfaces: Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Same species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Solid-hardwood lumber. 5. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. C. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints. 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent. 2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: Accuride International. a. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. b. Hettich America L.P. c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 107 degrees of opening. Product: Blum, Inc.; CLIP top BLUMOTION, Spring, Inserta. Zero Protrusion Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 155 degrees of opening. Product: Blum, Inc.; CLIP top BLUMOTION, Spring, Inserta. 2. Usage: At AV Cabinets. B. Back-Mounted Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B02011. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid [metal] [plastic], 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 13 - 5 D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: [ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081] [ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112]. E. Shelf Rests: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. Product: Häfele; 282.04.711, 5-mm Shelf Supports. F. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9. Product: Blum, Inc.; TANDEM. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 2.7 FABRICATION Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges and corners to 1/16-inch radius unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. C. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 1. For exposed glass edges, polish and grind smooth. 2.8 SHOP FINISHING Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 13 - 6 Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of cabinets. Transparent Finish: Finish: System - 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 1. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 2. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 3. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. A. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. B. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with cabinet surface. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inchesusing concealed shims. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 1. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with . SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 13 - 7 Shop Finishes: Touch up finishing after installation of architectural cabinets. Fill nail holes with matching filler. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. B. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06 41 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 06 44 00 - 1 SECTION 06 44 00 - ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: Interior ornamental woodwork. 1. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing ornamental woodwork items that are not concealed within other construction. 2. Shop finishing of interior ornamental woodwork. Related Requirements: Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing ornamental woodwork that are concealed within other construction before ornamental woodwork installation. 1.3 COORDINATION Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections, to ensure that interior ornamental woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, including the following: Dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections. 1. Attachment devices, and other components. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including blocking and reinforcement concealed by construction and specified in other Sections. Samples: For each exposed product and for each shop-applied color and finish specified. Size: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 06 44 00 - 2 Lumber Products: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of shop-applied exposed finish. Size: Lumber Products: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 2. A. Do not deliver interior ornamental woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. B. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. Handle and store fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS Weather Limitations for Exterior Work: Proceed with installation of exterior ornamental woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish is to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior ornamental woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupancy for the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior ornamental woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where ornamental woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 06 44 00 - 3 Established Dimensions: Where ornamental woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that ornamental woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK, GENERAL Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of ornamental woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2.2 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH Interior ornamental work for transparent finish includes the following: Wood columns. 1. Wood rails. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Species: White oak. 1. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Furring, Blocking, Shims, Hanging Strips, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. A. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 06 44 00 - 4 2.4 FABRICATION Fabricate ornamental woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. a. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times ornamental woodwork fabrication will be complete. 4. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. a. Verify that parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. 2.5 SHOP FINISHING Finish ornamental woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. A. Transparent Finish for Interior Items: Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. 1. Finish: System - 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed. 2. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 3. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 4. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter according to ASTM D 523. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 06 44 00 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Before installation, condition ornamental woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours prior to beginning of installation. A. Before installing ornamental woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required, including removing packing and backpriming concealed surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION Grade: Install ornamental woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed. A. Assemble ornamental woodwork, and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed during shop fabrication. B. Install ornamental woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. 1. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Scribe and cut ornamental woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. C. Anchor ornamental woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. 1. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with ornamental woodwork. 2. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced and with adjacent rows staggered. 3. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. 3.3 REPAIR Repair damaged and defective ornamental woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects and to result in interior ornamental woodwork being in compliance with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade. A. Where not possible to repair, replace defective Work. B. Shop Finish: Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of ornamental woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 06 44 00 - 6 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. END OF SECTION 06 44 00 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 1 SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For sealants, indicate VOC content. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 3 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. c. Grabber Construction Products. d. Hilti, Inc. e. Passive Fire Protection Partners. f. RectorSeal. g. Specified Technologies, Inc. h. Tremco, Inc. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 4 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. I. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 5 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 6 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07 84 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT FIRESTOPPING 07 84 43 - 1 SECTION 07 84 43 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers and for wall identification. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for firestop tracks for metal-framed partition heads. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For sealants, indicate VOC content. B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT FIRESTOPPING 07 84 43 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT FIRESTOPPING 07 84 43 - 3 B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. c. Grabber Construction Products. d. Hilti, Inc.. e. Passive Fire Protection Partners. f. RectorSeal. g. Roxul Inc. h. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company. i. Tremco, Inc.. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed. C. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. D. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT FIRESTOPPING 07 84 43 - 4 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system. C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fireresistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07 84 43 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Butyl joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping" for sealing joints in or between fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 2. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. 1. For sealants and sealant primers, include printed statement of VOC content. B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installer. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following: 1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT (ES-5): Mildew-resistant, singlecomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M. b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS1700 Sanitary. c. Pecora Corporation; 898 NST. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3 2.3 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolac. b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex Sil-A 700. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems. b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application 1: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. B. Joint-Sealant Application 2: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. C. Joint-Sealant Application 3: Concealed mastics. 1. Joint Locations: a. Beneath thresholds. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 - 1 SECTION 07 92 19 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric, latex, and butyl-rubber-based joint sealants for nonacoustical applications. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant. 1. Include VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in ½-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of acoustical joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hilti, Inc. CP 506 Smoke and Acoustic Sealant, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Accumetric LLC. b. GE Construction Sealants. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Tremco, Incorporated. 2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL SPRAYS A. Acoustic Spray for Concealed Joints: Provide manufacturer's standard sprayable latex material complying with ASTM C919 and the following: 1. Sound Transmission Performance: Spray effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through head-of-wall joints in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 90. 2. Movement Capability: 12.5 percent. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Hilti, Inc.; CP 572 Smoke and Acoustic Spray. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Batt: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of rock wool fibers; with maximum flame-spread index of 0 and smoke-developed index of 0, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 - 3 B. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. C. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. D. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 - 4 B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings. C. Install acoustical sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealant and spray during application in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. D. Install acoustic sealant and spray free of air pockets, embedded foreign matter, sags, and ridges. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess acoustical sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Remove excess acoustical spray from surfaces adjacent to joint, as indicated on Drawings. 3. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 4. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. F. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07 92 19 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08 14 33 - 1 SECTION 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Factory fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 3. Factory finishing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors without full glass lights. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Details of construction and glazing. 2. Factory-machining criteria. 3. Factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data, including the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimensions and location of hardware, lite locations, and glazing thickness. 3. Clearances and undercuts. 4. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08 14 33 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than ¼ inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty shall be in effect during specified period of time from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Interior Doors: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors from single manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08 14 33 - 3 1. Assemble interior doors, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. C. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde. D. Panel Products: Any of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2. Medium-density fiberboard (MDF,) complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 3. Veneer-core plywood. E. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials. 2.3 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Interior custom doors complying with AWI, AWMAC, and WI's Architectural Woodwork Standards and with other requirements specified. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Assa Abloy, Maiman. b. Karona by JELD-WEN. c. Masonite International, Harring Doors. d. VT Industries Inc. 2. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. 3. Panel Designs: Glass panels as indicated on Drawings. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 4. Finish: Transparent. 5. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 6. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White oak, rift sawn stiles and rails. 7. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber. Select veneers for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. Use veneers not less than 1/16 inch thick. 8. Stile and Rail Widths: a. Stiles, Top and Intermediate Rails: 4½ inches. b. Bottom Rails: 10 inches. 9. Molding Profile (Sticking): Architect to select from manufacturer’s standard options. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08 14 33 - 4 10. Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick, complying with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 11. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S. 6A and grade specified. 2.4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated: 1. Clearances: a. Provide ⅛ inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide ½ inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. c. Where threshold is shown on Drawings or scheduled, provide not more than ⅜ inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors ⅛ inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid-wood moldings, with one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. 1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: Architectural Woodwork Standards System 10, UV Curable, Water Based. 3. Finish: WDMA I.S. 6A TR-8 UV Cured Acrylated Polyester/Urethane. 4. Staining: Match architect’s sample. 5. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08 14 33 - 5 6. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory- Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08 14 33 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Automatic operators. C. Related Sections: 1. 06 10 53 – MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. 08 14 33 – STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 3. 28 13 00 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2 7. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors. 8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. B. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 4 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS: A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC). SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5 C. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. D. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 6 1.9 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.10 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: a. Mortise Locks and Latches: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Electromechanical door hardware: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than ½ inch high. D. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. 2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 8 C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.4 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all outswinging lockable doors. 5. Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries (BO) - LB Series. b. Hager Companies (HA) - CB Series. c. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - TA Series. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 9 2.5 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - QC (# wires) Option. B. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. C. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to throughdoor wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003. 2. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) – QCC Series. 2.6 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 10 1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor. 2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 5. Manufacturers: a. Burns Manufacturing (BU). b. Door Controls International (DC). c. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). d. Trimco (TC). B. Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consisting of active-leaf, holdopen lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Model as indicated in hardware sets. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burns Manufacturing (BU). b. Door Controls International (DC). c. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). d. Trimco (TC). 2.7 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 11 D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). 4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2). 5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2). G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores. H. Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. 2.8 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. b. No Substitution. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 12 2.9 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified locksets to be of type and design as specified below. 1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status monitoring, deadbolt monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Support end-of-line resistors contained within the lock case. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure. 2. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation. 3. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series. b. No Substitution. 2.10 INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT LOCKING DEVICES – MULTI-CLASS READER A. Integrated Wiegand Output Multi-Class Mortise Locks: Wiegand output ANSI A156.13, Grade 1, mortise lockset with integrated card reader, request-to-exit signaling, door position status switch, and latchbolt monitoring in one complete unit. Hard wired, solenoid driven locking/unlocking control of the lever handle trim, 3/4" deadlocking anti-friction latch, and 1" case-hardened steel deadbolt. Lock is U.L listed and labeled for use on up to 3 hour fire rated openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override. 1. Open architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Latchbolt monitoring and door position switch act in conjunction to report door-in-frame (DPS) and door latched (door closed and latched) conditions. 2. Integrated reader supports the following credentials: a. 125kHz proximity credentials: HID, AWID, Indala, and EM4102. b. 13.56 MHz proximity credentials: HID iClass, HID iClass SE, SE for MIFARE Classic, DESFire EV1. 3. 12VDC external power supply required for reader and lock, with optional 24VDC lock solenoid. Fail safe or fail secure options. 4. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation. 5. Support end-of-line resistors contained within the lock case. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 13 6. Installation requires only one cable run from the lock to the access control panel without requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules. 7. Installation to include manufacturer's access control panel interface board or module where required for Wiegand output protocol. 8. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – M1 8200 Series. 2.11 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. 4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Manufacturers: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 14 a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series. 2.12 ELECTROHYDRAULIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency. B. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. 2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening. D. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors. E. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power. F. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds. G. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts. H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components. I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. LCN Closers (LC) - 4640 Series. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 15 2. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series. 2.13 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC). 2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burns Manufacturing (BU). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 16 c. Trimco (TC). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Manufacturers: a. Glynn Johnson (GJ). b. Rixson Door Controls (RF). c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). 2.15 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 17 2.16 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels. 1. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series. B. Wiegand Test Unit: Test unit verifies proper Wiegand output integrated card reader lock installation in the field by testing for proper wiring, card reader data integrity, and lock functionality including lock/unlock, door position, and request-to-exit status. 12 or 24VDC voltage adjustable operating as Fail Safe or Fail Secure. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – WT2 Wiegand Test Unit. C. Switching Power Supplies: Provide power supplies with either single or dual voltage configurations at 12 or 24VDC. Power supplies shall have battery backup function with an integrated battery charging circuit and shall provide capability for power distribution, direct lock control and Fire Alarm Interface (FAI) through add on modules. Power supplies shall be expandable up to 16 individually protected outputs. Output modules shall provide individually protected, continuous outputs and/or individually protected, relay controlled outputs. 1. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - AQD Series. 2.17 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.18 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 18 C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 19 reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for project punch and reporting requirements including compliance with approved submittals and verification door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 20 conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. 1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate selection for the material and application. B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK – McKinney 2. RO – Rockwood 3. SA - SARGENT 4. SH - Schlage Electronic Security 5. BE - dormakaba Best 6. HS - HES 7. RF - Rixson 8. LC - LCN Closers 9. PE – Pemko 10. SU - Securitron 11. OT – Other 12. DJ - Don-Jo Hardware Sets Set: 6.0 Doors: 1149 3 Hinge, Full Mortise, Hvy Wt T4A3786 NRP US26D MK 1 Access Control Mort Lock AD-400-MS-70 MT RHO BD 8B 09-663 10-072 626 SH 1 Cylinder As Required 626 BE 1 Permanent Core Compatible with Facility's Existing System 626 BE 1 Panel Interface Module PIM-400 MT (as required) SH 1 Surface Closer 351 O EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 6" CSK BEV US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S773BL PE SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 21 END OF SECTION 087100 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 1 SECTION 08 88 13 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-resistance-rated glazing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for metal doors and frames to receive fire-resistant glazing. 2. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors to receive fire-resistant glazing. 3. Section 08 14 33 “Stile and Rail Wood Doors” for wood doors to receive fire-resistant glazing. 4. Section 08 43 13.13 "Fire-Resistive Framed Windows" for fixed window openings to receive fire-resistant glazing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C1036. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For sealants, indicate VOC content. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 2 B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches square. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installer and professional engineer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of glass and glazing product, from manufacturer, attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent label designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. C. Product Test Listings: From UL indicating fire-rated glass complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Labeling: Each lite shall bear permanent, nonremovable UL label certifying it for use in tested and rated fire-resistive assemblies. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Store sheets vertically, held off the ground, under cover, and protected from weather. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 3 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 4 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear), with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent. C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. D. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer unless fire-protection or fire-resistance rating is based on another product. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E119 or UL 263. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-resistance-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, that the glazing is approved for use in walls, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. C. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies of uncoated, ultraclear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pilkington North America; Pyrostop. b. Technical Glass Products; Pyrostop. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Contraflam. 2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 5 B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SilGlaze II SCS2800. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 2. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. D. Setting Blocks: Hardwood or calcium silicate; glass width by 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick. E. Spacers: Neoprene or other resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, adhesivebacked on one face only, tested for compatibility with specified glazing compound. F. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by manufacturer of glass and gaskets. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. C. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fireprotection rating indicated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 6 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as needed so that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products. B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. C. Install in vision panels in fire-rated doors in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80. D. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 7 F. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. G. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. H. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide ⅛-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. I. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as specified. K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 8 G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop, so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.7 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING SCHEDULE A. Glass Type FRG-1: 60-minute fire-resistance-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature-rise limitation; laminated glass with intumescent interlayers. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; Contraflam Structure 60. 2. Nominal Thickness: 31 mm. 3. Maximum Exposed Area: 7,574 sq. in. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 9 4. Maximum Exposed Width: 138 ½ inches. 5. Maximum Exposed Height: 138 ½ inches. 6. Application: Interior 1-hour fire-resistance-rated fixed windows. B. Glass Type FRG-2: 60-minute fire-resistance-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature-rise limitation; laminated glass with intumescent interlayers. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Technical Glass Products; Pilkington Pyrostop 60-101. 2. Nominal Thickness: 23 mm. 3. Maximum Exposed Area: 3,724 sq. in. 4. Maximum Exposed Width: 41⅝ inches. 5. Maximum Exposed Height: 89¾ inches. 6. Application: Interior 60-minute fire-resistance-rated doors. END OF SECTION 08 88 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 88 13 - 10 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 1 SECTION 09 01 90.52 - MAINTENANCE REPAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes maintenance repainting as follows: 1. Cleaning, repair, patching, and preparation of existing substrates. 2. Repainting. 3. Electrostatic applied coating to existing metal substrates. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting," for paint materials and systems for new construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following MPI gloss levels are defined in accordance with ASTM D 523. 1. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees. 2. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 3. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 4. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees. 5. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. 6. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. 7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform maintenance repainting in the following sequence, which includes work specified in this and other Sections: 1. Dismantle existing surface-mounted objects and hardware except items indicated to remain in place. Tag items with location identification and protect. 2. Verify that temporary protections have been installed. 3. Examine condition of surfaces to be painted. 4. Perform repairs required to achieve smooth, sound surface ready to receive paint. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 2 5. Remove existing paint to the degree required for each substrate and surface condition of existing paint. 6. Apply paint system. 7. Reinstall dismantled surface-mounted objects and hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include recommendations for product application and use. 2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each pattern, color, and gloss; in sizes indicated below. 1. Include a list of materials for each coat of each Sample. 2. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Sample Size: a. Painted Surfaces: 4-by-8-inch Samples for each color and material, on hardboard. C. Product List: For each paint product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each MPI-product category specified in paint systems, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Color Matching: Custom computer-match paint colors to match Architect's samples. B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of maintenance repainting processes for each type of coating system and substrate indicated and each color and finish required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Duplicate appearance of approved Sample submittals. 1. Locate mockups on existing surfaces where directed by Architect. 2. Surface-Preparation Mockups: On existing surfaces using applicable specified methods of cleaning and other surface preparation, provide mockup sample of at least 100 sq. ft. 3. Coating Mockups: One surface of at least 100 sq. ft. to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating system under same conditions as the completed Work. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 3 5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PREPARATORY CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP), ½ cup of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warm water for every 5 gal. of solution required. C. Mildewcide: Commercial proprietary mildewcide or a job-mixed solution prepared by mixing ⅓ cup of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water. D. Abrasives for Ferrous Metal Cleaning: Aluminum oxide paper, emery paper, fine steel wool, steel scrapers, and steel-wire brushes of various sizes. E. Rust Remover: Manufacturer's standard phosphoric acid-based gel formulation, also called "naval jelly," for removing corrosion from iron and steel. 2.2 PAINT REMOVERS A. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, waterrinsable, solvent-type paste, gel, or foamed emulsion formulation for removing paint from masonry, stone, wood, plaster, or metal as required to suit Project; and containing no methanol or methylene chloride. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 4 a. ABR Products, Inc.; ABR Citrus Paint Removers or Super Bio Strip Gel. b. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; S-301, S-303, or S-305. c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 7 without paper covering, Smart Strip, or Smart Strip Pro. d. EaCo Chem, Inc.; InStrip. e. PROSOCO, Inc.; Enviro Klean SafStrip or Enviro Klean SafStrip 8. 2.3 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 100 g/L. D. Colors: Match Architect's samples. E. Transition Coat: Paint manufacturer's recommended coating for use where a residual existing coating is incompatible with the paint system. 2.4 PAINT MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Interior Maintenance Repainting Schedule at the end of Part 3, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 5 2.5 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Metal-Patching Compound: Two-part, polyester-resin, metal-patching compound; knife-grade formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of metal repair indicated, tooling time required for the detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be produced for filling metal that has deteriorated from corrosion. Filler shall be capable of filling deep holes and spreading to feather edge. B. Gypsum-Plaster Patching Compound: Finish coat plaster and bonding compound according to ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Gypsum Board Patching Compound: Setting-type joint taping compound according to ASTM C 475; paper tape where required. D. Cementitious Patching Compounds: Cementitious patching compounds and repair materials specifically manufactured for filling cementitious substrates and for sanding or tooling prior to repainting; formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of cementitious substrate indicated, exposure to weather and traffic, the detail of work, and site conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. 3.2 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING, GENERAL A. Maintenance Repainting Appearance Standard: Completed work is to have a uniform appearance as viewed by Architect from building interior at 5 feet away from painted surface. B. Execution of the Work: In repainting surfaces, disturb them as minimally as possible and as follows: 1. Remove failed coatings and corrosion and repaint. 2. Verify that substrate surface conditions are suitable for repainting. 3. Allow other trades to repair items in place before repainting. 4. Repaint with sufficient coats to produce uniform appearance. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging surfaces. D. Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small areas that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Maintenance Repainting Appearance Standard" Paragraph, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 6 E. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use gentle methods, such as scraping and lightly hand sanding, that will not abrade softer substrates, reducing clarity of detail. F. Heat Processes: Do not use torches, heat guns, or heat plates. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of painting work. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for inspection. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: Do not begin application of coatings unless moisture content of exposed surface is below the maximum value recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and not greater than the following maximum values when measured with an electronic moisture meter appropriate to the substrate material: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Plaster: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. C. Alkalinity: Do not begin application of coatings unless surface alkalinity is within range recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. Conduct alkali testing with litmus paper on exposed plaster, cementitious, and masonry surfaces. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. 1. If existing surfaces cannot be prepared to an acceptable condition for proper finishing by using specified surface-preparation methods, notify Architect in writing. E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.4 PREPARATORY CLEANING A. General: Use the gentlest, appropriate method necessary to clean surfaces in preparation for painting. Clean all surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices. B. Detergent Hand Cleaning: Wash surfaces by hand using clean rags, sponges, and bristle brushes. Scrub surface with detergent solution and bristle brush until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that surface remains wet. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 7 C. Solvent Cleaning: Use solvent cleaning to remove oil, grease, smoke, and other contaminants from painted or unpainted surfaces before other preparation work. Wipe surfaces with solvent using clean rags and sponges. If necessary, spot-solvent cleaning may be employed just prior to commencement of paint application, provided enough time is allowed for complete evaporation. Use clean solvent and clean rags for the final wash to ensure that all foreign materials have been removed. Do not use solvents, including primer thinner and turpentine, that leave residue. D. Mildew: Clean off existing mildew by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. E. Chemical Rust Removal: 1. Remove loose rust scale with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. 2. Apply rust remover with brushes or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3. Allow rust remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing. Do not allow extended dwell time. 4. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags, or clean with method recommended in writing by manufacturer to remove residue. 5. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 6. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed. F. Mechanical Rust Removal: 1. Remove rust with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. Clean to bright metal. 2. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags. 3. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 4. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed. 3.5 PAINT REMOVAL A. General: Remove paint where indicated. Where cleaning methods have been attempted and further removal of the paint is required because of incompatible or unsatisfactory surfaces for repainting, remove paint to extent required by conditions. 1. Application: Apply paint removers according to paint-remover manufacturer's written instructions. Do not allow paint removers to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Apply materials to all surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices, to provide a uniform final appearance without streaks. b. After work is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks. 2. Brushes: Use brushes that are resistant to chemicals being used. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 8 a. Metal Substrates: If using wire brushes on metal, use brushes of same metal composition as metal being treated. B. Paint Removal with Hand Tools: Remove paint manually using hand-held scrapers, wire brushes, sandpaper, and metallic wool as appropriate for the substrate material. C. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint Remover: 1. Remove loose and peeling paint using water, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly. 2. Apply paint remover to dry, painted surface with brushes. 3. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing. 4. Remove chemicals and paint residue by the following methods, as recommended in writing by paint remover manufacturer: a. Rinse with cold or hot water applied by low or medium-pressure spray. b. Use mechanical removal methods. 5. Repeat process if necessary to remove all paint. 3.6 SUBSTRATE REPAIR A. General: Repair substrate surface defects that are inconsistent with the surface appearance of adjacent materials and finishes. B. Gypsum-Plaster and Gypsum-Board Substrates: 1. Repair defects including dents and chips more than ⅛ inch in size and all holes and cracks by filling with gypsum-plaster patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove protruding fasteners. 2. Rout out surface cracks to remove loose, unsound material; fill with patching compound and sand smooth. C. Metal Substrate: 1. Preparation: Treat repair locations by wire-brushing and solvent cleaning. Use chemical or mechanical rust removal method to clean off rust. 2. Defects in Metal Surfaces: Repair non-load-bearing defects in existing metal surfaces, including dents and gouges more than 1/16 inch deep or ½ inch across and all holes and cracks by filling with metal-patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove burrs and protruding fasteners. 3. Priming: Prime iron and steel surfaces immediately after repair to prevent flash rusting. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats to surfaces that are inaccessible after completion of the Work. D. Cementitious Material Substrate: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 9 1. General: Repair defects including dents and chips more than ¼ inch in size and all holes and cracks by filling with cementitious patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove protruding fasteners. 2. Concrete, Cement Plaster, and Other Cementitious Products: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. If surfaces are too alkaline to paint, correct this condition before painting. 3. Existing Coatings: Remove surface irregularities by scraping or sanding to produce uniform substrate for coating application; sand or mechanically abrade coating to remove gloss and provide for adhesion of primer; apply one coat primer of type recommended by coating manufacturer for maximum coating adhesion. 3.7 PAINT APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for application methods unless otherwise indicated in this Section. B. Prepare surfaces to be painted according to the Surface-Preparation Schedule and with manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition. C. Apply a transition coat over incompatible existing coatings. D. Metal Substrate: Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges before applying full coat. Apply two coats to surfaces that are inaccessible after completion of the Work. Tint stripe coat different than the main coating and apply with brush. E. Blending Painted Surfaces: When painting new substrates patched into existing surfaces or touching up missing or damaged finishes, apply coating system specified for the specific substrate. Apply final finish coat over entire surface from edge to edge and corner to corner. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 10 3.9 SURFACE-PREPARATION SCHEDULE A. General: Before painting, prepare surfaces for painting according to applicable requirements specified in this schedule. 1. Examine surfaces to evaluate each surface condition according to paragraphs below. 2. Where existing degree of soiling prevents examination, preclean surface and allow it to dry before making an evaluation. 3. Repair substrate defects according to "Substrate Repair" Article. B. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 0 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Existing paint film in good condition and tightly adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Not required. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where needed. Roughen or degloss cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion according to paint manufacturer's written instructions. C. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 1 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film cracked or broken but adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Scrape by hand-tool cleaning methods to remove loose paint until only tightly adhered paint remains. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate if required. Roughen, degloss, and sand the cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion and a smooth finish according to paint manufacturer's written instructions. D. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 2 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film loose, flaking, or peeling. 2. Paint Removal: Remove loose, flaking, or peeling paint film by hand-tool or chemical paint-removal methods. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where needed. Use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate if required. Sand surfaces to smooth remaining paint film edges. Prepare bare cleaned surface to be painted according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for substrate construction materials. 3.10 INTERIOR MAINTENANCE REPAINTING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal Substrates 1. Latex System: MPI RIN 5.1N system over a transition coat. a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 11 b. Prime Coat: Primer, Metal, Surface Tolerant, MPI #23. 1) Benjamin Moore; Coronado Rust Scat Metal Primer. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semigloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. 1) Benjamin Moore; Natura Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss. B. Gypsum Board and Plaster: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System over Waterborne Primer: MPI RIN 9.2M: a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. b. Prime Coat: Primer, Stain Blocking, Water Based, MPI #137. 1) Benjamin Moore; Sure Seal Latex Primer Sealer. c. Topcoat, Ceilings and Soffits: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat Finish. d. Topcoat, Walls: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish. C. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System over High-Build Masonry Block Filler. a. Prime Coat: Hi-Build Masonry Block Filler, MPI #4X-GREEN. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Hi-Build Masonry Block Filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Same as topcoat. c. Topcoat, Walls: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish. END OF SECTION 09 01 90.52 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 12 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 51 13 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for suspension systems included with acoustical panel ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for steel unless otherwise indicated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or embossed, high-strength steel studs and tracks. 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3) MarinoWARE. b. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch. c. Depth: 3⅝ inches, or as indicated. 2. Embossed, High Strength Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally comparable to conventional ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3) MarinoWARE. b. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0190 inch. c. Depth: 3⅝ inches, or as indicated. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: provide one of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; CST Slotted Deflection Track or SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 3) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track or Slotted Deflecto Track. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3 D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; FAS Track. b. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; BlazeFrame. c. Fire Trak Corp; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch. F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-steel thickness, with minimum ½-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1½ inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1½ by 1½ inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch. 2. Depth: ⅞ inch. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES as appropriate for the substrate. a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure. b. Type: Adhesive anchor. c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, ⅛ inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum ½-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than ⅛ inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6 3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within ⅛ inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for acoustical joint sealants installed in gypsum board assemblies. 2. Section 09 21 16.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 3. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Gypsum board, Type X. 2. Glass-mat interior gypsum board. 3. Glass-mat, water-resistant backing board. 4. Interior trim. 5. Joint treatment materials. 6. Sound-attenuation blankets. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. National Gypsum Company. e. PABCO Gypsum. f. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: ⅝ inch. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 3. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions to match existing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Board: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow ¼- to ⅜-inch-wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide ¼- to ½-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 C. Multilayer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with ¼-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for acoustical panels. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 7 a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1 SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoplastic-rubber base. 2. Rubber stair accessories. 3. Vinyl molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, indicating VOC content for adhesives. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long. D. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 2 B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 3. Flexco. 4. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 5. Nora Systems, Inc. 6. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location: a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H. Colors: Match Architect's sample. 2.2 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 3 3. Flexco. 4. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 5. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Reducer: Vinyl tile to floor reducer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Johnsonite; RRS-XX. 2. Profile and Dimensions: 1¼-inch wide, ⅛ inch thick. C. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of available colors and patterns. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 60 g/L or less. C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stairtread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 4 B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 5 H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 1 SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid vinyl floor tile. 2. Vinyl composition floor tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, indicating VOC content for adhesives. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 2 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Solid Vinyl Floor Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of solid vinyl floor tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 3 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE (LVT) A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Interface Drawn Lines, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Flexco, Inc. 2. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. B. Luxury Vinyl Tile: Manufacturer's layered construction consisting of an embossed, clear, rigid vinyl wear layer over a high-fidelity print layer on solid vinyl backing. Wear layer protected by the manufacturer's high-performance finish. C. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700. 1. Class: Class III, Printed Film Vinyl Tile. D. Thickness: 4.5mm. E. Size: 25cm by 1m. F. Color: Match Architect's sample. G. Installation Method: Ashlar 2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Standard Excelon. 2. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company; Tarkett VCT. B. Wearing Surface: Smooth. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Size: 12 by 12 inches. E. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 4 B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Surface Cleaning: Remove dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials. 1. Remove old adhesive. 2. Remove all paint, varnish, oil, and wax. 3. Vacuum-clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis in ashlar pattern. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 5 C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 19 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 6 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SNEE HALL RENOVATION FOR COLOCATION OF EAS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 1921 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09 77 23 - 1 SECTION 09 77 23 - FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop-fabricated, fabric-wrapped wall panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include fabric facing, panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated. B. LEED Documentation Submittals: 1. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, provide the following information when available: a. Environmental Product Declarations. b. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1 percent (1000 ppm). c. Manufacturer’s self-declared reports or third-party verified corporate sustainability reports (CSR) for raw material and source extraction. 2. Documentation for products that comply with LEED requirements for multi-attribute optimization. a. Include documentation for regional materials, indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material and costs of regional materials. 3. Documentation for products that comply with LEED requirements for material ingredient optimization. 4. Documentation for products that comply with LEED requirements for leadership extraction practices. Include the following: SNEE HALL RENOVATION FOR COLOCATION OF EAS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 1921 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09 77 23 - 2 a. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers, indicating participation in an extended producer responsibility program and statement of costs. b. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers, indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement of costs. c. Documentation for regional materials, indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material and costs of regional materials. 5. Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 6. Laboratory test reports for ceilings, walls, and thermal insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. C. Shop Drawings: For panel assembly and installation. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. 2. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work. 3. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fabric facing. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection. E. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Panel Edge: 12-inch-long Samples showing each edge profile, corner, and finish. 2. Core Material: 12-inch-square Sample at corner. 3. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats. 2. Items penetrating or covered by panels including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. SNEE HALL RENOVATION FOR COLOCATION OF EAS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 1921 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09 77 23 - 3 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of panel to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal instructions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with fabric and panel manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling. B. Deliver materials and panels in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install panels until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install panels until a permanent level of lighting is provided on surfaces to receive the panels. C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect panels from exposure to airborne odors such as tobacco smoke, and install panels under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air. D. Field Measurements: Verify panel locations and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate them on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Panels shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. SNEE HALL RENOVATION FOR COLOCATION OF EAS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 1921 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09 77 23 - 4 B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available. 1. Environmental Product Declarations. a. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1 percent (1000 ppm). 2. Manufacturer’s self-declared reports or third-party verified corporate sustainability reports (CSR) for raw material and source extraction. C. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. D. Low-emitting requirements: Comply with VOC limits and other requirements as detailed in Section 01 81 13.14 "Sustainable Design Requirements – LEED v4 BD+C." 2.2 FABRIC-WRAPPED WALL PANELS A. Fabric-Wrapped Tackable Wall Panel (FWTP): Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges, and back edge border of core. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Acoustical Solutions, Inc. b. Armstrong World Industries. c. Decoustics Limited; a Saint Gobain company. d. Golterman & Sabo. e. Perdue Acoustics, Inc. 2. Panel Shape: Flat. 3. Mounting: Metal z-clips or bar hangers, secured to substrate. 4. Core: Mineral-fiber board. 5. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core with no frame. 6. Edge Profile: Square. 7. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 8. Facing Material: 100 percent woven polyester fabric. 9. Nominal Core Thickness: 1/2 inch. 10. Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings. 11. Panel Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Core Materials: 1. Mineral-Fiber Board: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 10, respectively; minimum density of 13 lb/cu. ft. SNEE HALL RENOVATION FOR COLOCATION OF EAS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 1921 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09 77 23 - 5 B. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as indicated by manufacturer's designations. 1. Manufacturer: Guilford of Maine. 2. Product Line/Pattern: Chase/2138. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 4. Fiber Content: 100 percent woven polyester. 5. Width: 66 inches. 6. Applied Treatments: Stain resistance. C. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of panel, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of panel, and as follows: 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2. Hook-and-Loop Strips: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Metal Clips or Bar Hangers: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of panel and the other part to substrate, designed to permit unit removal. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage. B. Edge Hardening: For mineral-fiber board cores, chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached. C. Facing Material: Apply fabric fully covering visible surfaces of panel; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter. 1. Square Corners: Tailor corners. D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Panels: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner. SNEE HALL RENOVATION FOR COLOCATION OF EAS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 1921 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09 77 23 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fabric, fabricated panels, substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting panel performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panels in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install panels with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount panels securely to supporting substrate. C. Align fabric pattern and grain with adjacent panels. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative. B. Variation of Joint Width: Not more than 1/32-inch variation from hairline in 48 inches, noncumulative. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 09 77 23 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00 - 1 SECTION 10 11 00 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass markerboards. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 77 23 "Fabric-Wrapped Panels" for tackable, fabric-covered panels mounted on walls. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints. Show locations of field-assembled joints for factoryfabricated units too large to ship in one piece. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factory-applied color finishes, and as follows: 1. Samples of facings for each visual display panel type, indicating color and texture. 2. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display unit indicated. 1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8½ by 11 inches, with facing, core, and backing indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required. 2. Trim: 6-inch- long sections of each trim profile. E. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display units by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS MARKERBOARDS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Clarus Glassboards, LLC Float, or one of the following: 1. A-1 Visual Systems; Style 2. 2. Egan Visual, Inc.; EganAero Hover. B. Glass Markerboards: Fabricated of 6-mm tempered glass with steel backing for use with magnets. 1. Edge Treatment: Smooth polished edge with eased corners. 2. Surface: Glossy. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00 - 3 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Mounting: Manufacturer's concealed extruded aluminum top-and-bottom back-mounted Z-clips holding glass approximately ½ inch from wall. D. Marker Tray: Magnetic, extruded aluminum, 12 inches long. E. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality Q3, with exposed edges seamed before tempering. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. C. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 2.3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00 - 4 B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards. C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. 1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean visual display units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room. B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION 10 11 00 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 1 SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers. A. Owner-Furnished Material: Hand-carried fire extinguishers. B. Related Requirements: Section 10 44 13 "Fire Protection Cabinets." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher. A. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fireprotection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 2 1.7 WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10 when testing interval required by NFPA 10 is within the warranty period. a. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." A. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each indicated. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: Amerex Corporation. a. Badger Fire Protection. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers, fire-protection cabinets, and accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 3 B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container : UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 10 44 16 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 1 SECTION 11 52 13 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. This Section includes the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, and services to completely execute the provision of products as described in this specification, including but not limited to: a. Projection screens. B. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section. C. Related Specification Sections 1. Division 0 “Procurement and Contracting Requirements” 2. Division 01 “General Requirements” 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 (Submittal Procedures) and as required by other sections of the Specifications. 2. Unless directed otherwise in writing by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not authorized to proceed with the acquisition, fabrication, assembly, installation, or any work related to any systems or components until the submittals outlined in this section have been approved by the Owner’s Representative. Any acquisition, assembly or installation of any systems or components without the Owner Representative’s approval shall be subject to removal at the Contractor’s expense. B. Product Data 1. Product cut (specification) sheets shall be submitted for products listed in Part 2 of this Section. C. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted for projection screens. 2. Shop drawings shall show projection screen size, screen case size & color, screen material, screen drop length, mounting points & dimensions, and methods of attachment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 2 A. Qualifications 1. Worker experienced in performing work of this Section who has specialized in work similar to that required of this project. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 2. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site and facilities for delivery of materials and products. 3. Projection screens shall not be delivered until the building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens shall be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to begin. 4. The Contractor shall confirm before delivery that hallways, stairways, passageways, doorways, rooms, entries, elevators and foyers are of sufficient size to accommodate the passage and installation of the products and systems. B. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site, and facilities for storage and handling of materials and products. 2. Store projection screens in a dry, ventilated area, protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature less than 80 degrees F. 3. Projection screens shall always be transported, handled, and stored in a horizontal position, never vertically. 4. Handle projection screen materials with care in order to prevent damage. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. General 1. Refer to Division 1 of the construction documents for this project for coordination with other trades on this project. 2. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site, and facilities for installing of materials and products. 3. Perform projection screen work when temperatures are greater than 40 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 1. Acceptable products are listed in this Section and on the drawings. 2. See drawing TA601 “Projection Screen Schedule” and report any discrepancies between schedule and these specifications to Owner’s Representative. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 3 3. Each product to be supplied under this specification shall be new, under warranty, and the current model of a standard product of an original product manufacturer of record. Bstock, previously installed, refurbished or used products shall not be provided on this project. 4. Product substitution is allowed only by written consent of the Owner’s Representative. 5. The Contractor shall provide all options, accessories, and hardware necessary to meet the function of the design even if they are not specifically listed. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Projection Screen 1. Wall mounted manual pull-down projection screen. 2. Complete screen (case, surface material, and roller). 3. Manufacturer & model: Da-Lite Model C with CSR model # 34726. 4. Quantity: 1. 5. Viewing area: 80” W x 50” H (94” diagonal). 6. Aspect ratio: 16:10. 7. Screen material: Matte white, non-tensioned, no seam, flame retardant, mildew resistant. 8. Screen (black) drop: standard 2” at top of screen material. 9. Screen edge: black masking borders. 10. Case color/finish: white. B. Projection Screen Mounting Brackets 1. Wall mounting brackets. 2. Manufacturer & model: Da-Lite model # 40932. 3. Quantity: 1 pair. 4. Bracket color/finish: white. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all fasteners, hardware, anchors, brackets and other components to assure complete, functional and secure installation of all products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions 1. The Contractor shall assess the readiness and cleanliness of the site prior to product installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Projection Screen and Mounting Brackets SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 4 1. Comply with manufacturer’s written data and specifications, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions, and technical data sheets. 2. Install all products at locations and heights indicated on Drawings. 3. Coordinate projection screen placement with placement of other ceiling and wall mounted components, including but not limited to lighting fixtures, HVAC duct & equipment, fire alarm/suppression systems, conduit, pipes, and chalk/white boards. Notify the Owner’s Representative of conflicts prior to product installation. 4. All supports shall meet or exceed the load requirements of the intended application with a minimum safety factor of five. 5. Coordinate requirements for blocking, structural supports, bracing, and ceiling openings to ensure adequate means for installation of screen. 6. Install projection screens, mounting brackets/hardware, and accessories in accordance with reviewed shop drawings at locations and heights indicated. 7. Securely install screen components plumb and level to supporting substrate. 8. Remove all adhesives, strings, plastic wrap, and similar items that would prevent the unobstructed movement of the projection screen and screen material. B. Interface with Other Work 1. Coordinate with AV Contractor for final placement of projection screen in relation to installation of ceiling mounted projector. END OF SECTION 11 52 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 1 SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material backsplashes and end splashes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials. 1. For adhesives, provide documentation indicating VOC content. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 1. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Avonite Surfaces. b. DuPont Corian. c. Formica Corporation. d. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc. 2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with hole for wire passage. 1. Product: Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.; SS3 – 2" Stathis/Sherman Grommet Set. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of available colors. B. Countertop Support Brackets: Extruded aluminum L-brackets, welded construction, with Tshaped horizontal leg and vertical leg designed for concealed or surface mounting as indicated on Drawings. 1. Product: Rangine Corporation; Rakks EH Series Support Bracket. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 3 2. Size: As required to support countertops indicated. 3. Finish: Clear anodized. 2.3 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Premium. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash. C. Countertops: ½-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. D. Backsplashes: ½-inch-thick, solid surface material. E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. G. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening. 2. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 4 B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of ⅛ inch in 8 feet, ¼ inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through support brackets or corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. C. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. D. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. E. Install grommets as directed by Architect, counterbored for installation flush with surface of countertop. F. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 12 36 61.16 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - 1 SECTION 23 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ball valves. 2. Balancing valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. 2. Section 23 21 13 "Hydronic Piping." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Unless otherwise noted, all valves for shut-off service shall be ball valves. B. Valves for balancing operations shall not be ball or butterfly. C. End connections for NPS 2" and below shall be the same as is used for fittings. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - 2 D. A manufacturer's valve tag shall be on all valves identifying the valve type and major component materials. E. Install valves after welding adjacent to valve is completed to protect seat and disk. F. Insulated valves shall have extended handle stems. G. All valves shall be fully bi-directional and suitable for dead end service. H. Valve packing compression is to be independent of the stem, ball or handle systems. All valve stems are to be blowout proof. Packing shall be accessible without disturbing the insulation. I. All valves used for vent or drain service on water systems shall have a brass hose connection with cap and chain. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. All Water Services: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Body Style: Standard Port. 3. Trim: Type 316 stainless-steel ball and stem, with stem extension to raise handle out of insulation. 4. Seat: Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled, double seal. 5. Seat Working P/T Rating: 300 psig at 250 deg F minimum. 6. Body Working P/T Rating: 300 psig at 300 deg F minimum. 7. WOG Rating: 300 psig minimum. 8. Saturated Steam Rating: 150 psig minimum. 2.3 BALANCING VALVES A. Calibrated Type: 1. Bronze body/brass ball (1/2" to 2" size), glass-and-carbon-filled Teflon (TFE) seat rings, differential pressure readout ports across valve seat area with internal EPT inserts and check valves. 2. 1/4"-NPT tapped drain/purge port with memory stop, leak-tight at full rated working pressure, and with preformed insulation/cover. 3. Ratings: 175-psig maximum operating pressure, 250oF maximum operating temperature. 4. Product—No Substitution: Bell & Gossett Type CB; line size unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. END OF SECTION 23 05 23 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 1 SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Welding certificates. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel. 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts. 2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 3 f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized. B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division. e. NIBCO INC. f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. g. PHS Industries, Inc. 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Coating: Prime coat. 2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 4 B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 5 B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 6 M. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 4. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 7 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing. G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 8 H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for chilled-water and condenser-water insulated piping and tubing. I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 3. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 4. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 9 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 10 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 23 05 29 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1 SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Duct labels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. D. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. E. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. F. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. G. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts. B. Coordinate color schedule for each duct system with Cornell University standard. C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Variable-air-volume systems, including existing-to-remain AHU as required. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Variable-flow hydronic systems, including exiting-to-remain pumps as required. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. B. Certified TAB reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 2 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Commissioning Authority. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 3 performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. K. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 4 B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation" and Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. G. Check for airflow blockages. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 5 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record final fan-performance data. 3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 3. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 4. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 5. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 6 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Water flow rate. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.11 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 7 B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Manufacturers' test data. 2. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 3. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units and air valves, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 1 SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 3. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any). 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports and hangers. B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems a. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule" shown on Drawings. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket and integral vapor barrier. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "FactoryApplied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 3 a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2.3 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Vimasco Corporation. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 4 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.4 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum. 2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation systems below indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. Factoryapplied jackets shall include vapor barrier systems for all below ambient temperature applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.6 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 5 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. D. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 2. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Provide adhesively attached pins ONLY when weld pins are not possible to install due to space constraints. Comply with the following requirements: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 6 a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel or aluminum or stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, aluminum, stainless-steel, or nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. E. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 2.7 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 7 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Provide vapor barrier for all below-ambient services, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 8 N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Section Division 07 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with insulation pins, and wire and adhesive. 1. Install cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 2. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 9 3. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 4. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 5. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.6 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Ductwork and plenum insulation as scheduled on Drawings. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. END OF SECTION 23 07 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 1 SECTION 23 07 19 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 2 having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule" shown on Drawings. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 3 F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C547. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. 3. 850 deg F. 4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. C. ASJ Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2.3 SEALANTS A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 4 B. Joint Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F. b. Color: White or gray. C. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.4 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation systems below indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. Factoryapplied jackets shall include vapor barrier systems for all below-ambient-temperature applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 2.5 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 5 c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 6 H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Provide vapor barrier for all below-ambient services. Seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Provide insulation inserts or insulation shields inside all exterior pipe hangers for all below-ambient service. 2. Install insulation continuously through hangers. 3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints. P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 7 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 for penetration firestopping. 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation and fitting covers made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation and fitting covers of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation and fitting covers of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation and fitting covers of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 8 7. Install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape to maintain vapor barrier on cold services. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with fitting covers. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 9 3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where PVC jackets are indicated and for horizontal applications, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. 3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules on the Drawings or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range scheduled on the Drawings. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. END OF SECTION 23 07 19 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 1 SECTION 23 09 23 – BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps. B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature. C. BACnet-Specific Definitions: 1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a network. 2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device. 3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number. 4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International. 5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device. D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal. E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 2 F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system. G. COV: Changes of value. H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated. I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data. J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications. K. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic. L. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different communication protocols. M. HLC: Heavy load conditions. N. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively. O. I/P: Current to pneumatic. P. LAN: Local area network. Q. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. R. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data. S. MTBF: Mean time between failures. T. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for transmission of global data. U. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to another network. No routing information is added to protocol. V. PDA: Personal digital assistant. W. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 3 X. POT: Portable operator's terminal. Y. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness. Z. RAM: Random access memory. AA. RF: Radio frequency. BB. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer. CC. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database. DD. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows. EE. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. FF. USB: Universal Serial Bus. GG. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying protocol. HH. VAV: Variable air volume. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each control device, panel, controller, and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation, start-up, calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements. B. Control-System Architecture Diagram: Submit a system architecture one-line diagram indicating schematic location of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. The BACS vendor shall indicate address and type for each control unit; as well as indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN. C. Floor Plans: Submit a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator workstations, interface devices, UPSs, etc., located and identified. The BACS vendor shall indicate all network components (repeaters, routers, etc.); network wiring shall be shown and identified on the floor plan drawings. D. Detailed Wiring Diagrams: Include detailed wiring. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., all wiring diagrams for the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown on one SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 4 drawing. The supply fan components and devices should not be shown separate from return fan components and devices, etc.). E. Sample Graphics and Trends: Submit draft samples of the actual graphics to be used for the project. F. Operation and Maintenance Materials: Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) materials generally in concert with training. O&M materials shall include the following 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory. 2. BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral. 3. BACS Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software. 4. All information provided during the submittal phase; updated with as-built information. As-built panel drawings shall also be included as part of the O&M manual process. The drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate all the systems controlled from that particular panel. The drawings shall include the system schematic and detailed panel wiring diagram. Also included (typically noted on the system schematic diagrams) should be the specific locations of any remote devices such as remote static pressure sensors, differential pressure sensors, etc. 5. Each control panel on the project shall include an as-built hard copy of all drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its field devices. This documentation shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. 6. The final as-built controls drawings (PDF) shall also be accessible via the web-based graphics. G. Software Submittal: 1. Cross-referenced listing of software to be loaded on each operator workstation, server, gateway, and DDC controller. 2. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross-referenced to products in which software will be installed. 3. Operating system software, operator interface and programming software, color graphic software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third-party software. 4. Include a flow diagram and an outline of each subroutine that indicates each program variable name and units of measure. 5. Listing and description of each engineering equation used with reference source. 6. Listing and description of each constant used in engineering equations and a reference source to prove origin of each constant. 7. Description of operator interface to alphanumeric and graphic programming. 8. Description of each network communication protocol. 9. Description of system database, including all data included in database, database capacity and limitations to expand database. 10. Description of each application program and device drivers to be generated, including specific information on data acquisition and control strategies showing their relationship to system timing, speed, processing burden and system throughout. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 5 11. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. H. Shop Drawings: 1. General Requirements: a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission. b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches information in each title block. c. Prepare Drawings using CAD. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable. 3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 4. Plan Drawings indicating the following: a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping. b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with control products indicated. c. Each desktop operator workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to DDC controller, if included in Project. d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed installed condition. e. Network communication cable and raceway routing. f. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing, coordinated with building services for review before installation. 5. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following: a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve. b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number. c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system. d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating labels for all wiring terminals. e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different drawings showing same point. f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers. g. Narrative sequence of operation. h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 6 6. Control panel drawings indicating the following: a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and connections. b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components, cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space. c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend. d. Unique drawing for each panel. 7. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following: a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each. b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system. c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or fiber-optic cable type. Indicate raceway type and size for each. d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of operator interface with unique identification for each. 8. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following: a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each. c. Each product requiring power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each. 9. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following: a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product. 10. Color graphics indicating the following: a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided. b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of pictures, graphics and data displayed. c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens. I. System Description: 1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other network devices, and power supplies. 2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and events which initiate generation. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 7 3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to, the following: a. Loss of power. b. Loss of network communication signal. c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints. d. Operator workstation failure. e. Server failure. f. Gateway failure. g. Network failure h. Controller failure. i. Instrument failure. j. Control damper and valve actuator failure. 4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner. 5. Description of testing plans and procedures. 6. Description of Owner training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROLLERS A. General: The control system shall consist of an inter-network of controllers. It is intended to allow cost-effective application of manufacturers’ standard products while maintaining the integrity and reliability of the control functions commensurate with their application. B. Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operating independently, in standalone fashion, with no communication to other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that are shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this standalone functionality. C. Where control sequences depend on global variables such as outside-air temperature, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. Examples of required functional point groupings are as follows: 1. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly associated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes the terminals that may be associated with that air handler. Values that may be received across the network include humidity, terminal-based reset parameters, and smoke modes. 2. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system such as pumps, flow meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves, etc. This excludes the terminals on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network include outside-air temperature and humidity, emergency power source indication, and terminal-based reset parameters. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 8 3. All points and functions required to control one terminal system including dampers, valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not include the scheduling period or any outside air that may be necessary for control. D. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements defined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm. E. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the stand-alone requirements. F. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in nonvolatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of power occurs. G. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master. H. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a selfdiagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failure mode. I. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts. 2.2 SENSORS A. General: All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do not require system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters in control panels 5' above finished floor. B. Temperature Sensors: 1. Sensor Resolution: When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise). 2. Room Temperature Sensor: These shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 9 a. Sensing element: RTD or thermistor, +/- 0.8°F accuracy at calibration point. b. Setpoint Adjustment: Provide where indicated. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS. c. Occupancy Override: Provide a button on the room sensor enclosure where indicated, generally in office spaces that do not have occupancy sensors. Public spaces shall not have occupancy override. This shall be a momentary contact closure. d. Display: Alphanumeric. e. Sensors shall be provided with communication jack and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. 2.3 CONTROL VALVES A. General: 1. Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close off pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. Valves shall be selected such that they are not, as a practice, “oversized.” 2. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be provided for all control valves. General guidelines are indicated below. When the selection criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlation between stroke and flow. Actuator positioning requirements are as follows for each type, if used: a. Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0- to 10-V dc. b. Pilot positioners shall be required as necessary to keep the valve closed under the maximum differential pressure. B. Coil Valves, Water: 1. Modulating water valves shall generally be ball valves with an equal percentage characteristic. Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for 50%-100% of the typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. The minimum design CV shall be no less than 1.9. 2. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against 120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully closed." 3. Type: Two-way, V-port ball valve with characterizing disk, 1/4 turn. 4. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated. 5. Ball & Stem: Stainless steel. 6. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon. 7. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; valves 4 inches and larger shall have single operator. 8. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 10 9. Fail positions shall generally be as follows: a. Terminal hot-water radiation: fail last. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Belimo b. Valve Solutions 2.4 ACTUATORS A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and adequate close off rating as required. 2.5 CERTIFICATION A. Each airflow control device shall be factory calibrated to the job-specific airflows as detailed on the plans and specifications using NIST traceable air stations and instrumentation having a combined accuracy of no more than ±1% of signal over the entire range of measurement. Electronic airflow control devices shall be further calibrated and their accuracy verified to ±5% of signal at a minimum of 48 different airflows across the full operating range of the device. B. Each airflow control device shall be marked with device-specific factory calibration data. At a minimum, it should include the tag number, serial number, model number, eight-point characterization information, and quality control inspection numbers. All information shall be stored by the manufacturer for use with as-built documentation. 2.6 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures: 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet. 2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. 3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel. 4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4. 5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. 6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports. 7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 11 B. Power Supplies: 1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as required with the ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot on turn on or off. Operating temperature shall be -20 to +70ºC 2. The BACS Contractor shall certify, in writing, at the time of shop drawing submittal that the DDC equipment provided will not cause, as a result of its operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power systems. 3. Class II transformers shall be used. 2.7 CONTROL WIRING A. General: 1. Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, all I/O wiring shall be twisted shielded cable. For communications, the BACS equipment manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations shall apply. 2. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression fittings. 3. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway. 4. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per code. 5. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT. 6. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. 7. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHUs shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. 8. Wire shall be unspliced from the controller to the sensor or device. 9. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. 10. For sensors with twisted shielded pair cable, the shield shall be grounded at the panel and taped back at the sensor. 11. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. 12. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes, enclosures, components, and other controls-related work. B. Responsibilities: 1. The BACS Contractor shall be responsible for the following: a. All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms and functions to report these alarms and functions to the BACS head-end. b. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls. c. All power supply wiring for all BACS components. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 12 2. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following as they relate to the BACS: a. The electrical trade shall provide “lock-out stop” control wiring. b. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures by the electrical trade. c. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electrical trades except for the power supply wiring to electric damper motors that is specifically excluded from the electrical trade work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This Section defines requirements for configuration and installation of the BACS. B. Devices (i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in a readily accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor level without the use of a ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration. C. Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted within a cabinet) must be suitable for such installations (e.g., do not install a device that is intended to be installed in a cabinet in an exposed location). 3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION A. Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configuration documentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in this Section shall be provided/updated per configuration management requirements to reflect the entire installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform to Cornell’s specific conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard 15956. No device will be connected to a Cornell network until these conventions have been understood and met. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic Corporation 3.3 CONTROL PANELS A. Control panels and enclosures housing the controllers shall be coordinated to the extent possible, to share vertical and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize the cost of homeruns to terminal equipment. B. Control panels shall be located in equipment rooms, where practicable, and in locations maintaining ambient conditions between 50 deg F and 90 deg F and 10% to 85% relative SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 13 humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of these ranges shall have enclosures outfitted with heating or cooling devices to provide the proper environmental conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back plates and keyed, hinged covers shall be used. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4 when located in mechanical spaces and NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces. C. Cornell must have quick, direct access to all control panels to maintain building integrity similar to that provided for fire emergencies without going through user spaces. Field panels shall be located outside of user areas where practical. If field panels must be located in user areas, they shall be in areas with easy access. Protection and separation for user activities will be provided. D. Fabrication: 1. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. 2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. 3. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. 4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. 5. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. 6. Label the power source and circuit number for each panel. 3.4 CONTROLLERS A. The controllers provided shall meet the performance requirements for throughput, response time, point capacity, trend log capacity, etc., as stated in this Section and Section 23 09 25. The controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carry out the sequences of operation contained in the project documents. While Section 23 09 25 contains several constraints on the controller system architecture, it is recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally acceptable. For example, it may be possible to meet the project requirements with a single large controller or several smaller ones. Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe controllers' system architecture or controllers' detailed characteristics, such as processor speed, amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc. B. Since these guidelines with respect to controllers are performance oriented, rather than prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capable of direct digital control. In those cases where distinguishing between controllers with differing capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used (and is also defined in Section 23 09 25): 1. Building-level controller: These are controllers that are connected to the campus backbone network and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They will typically be used to control and monitor one or more large systems or be applied to other buildingwide functions. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC). 2. System-level controller. These controllers may, or may not, be directly connected to the campus backbone network. They will typically be dedicated to the control of a single SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 14 large piece of equipment such as an air handler DOAS unit or a lab environment with fume hoods. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC). 3. Field-level controller. These controllers will be on a lower performance BACnet LAN such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for control of "unitary" devices such as VAV boxes, fan-coil units, etc. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). C. Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident in ROM. It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Real-time operating system software. 2. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization (with the exception of fieldlevel controllers). 3. Controller diagnostic software. 4. DDC software. 5. Alarm processing and buffering software. 6. Energy management software. 7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. 8. I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentation does not specifically indicate for which points this is required, control vendor shall request in writing a list of such points. If this has not been requested, the vendor shall reprogram or reconfigure the systems as required during testing. D. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. E. Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall be capable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending at least five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. The BACS vendor shall provide control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such as comma separated text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner-accessible SQL database. F. Trend Graphs: Web-based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. The BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a trend for every analog control loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control output. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 15 G. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used in commissioning to observe loop responses and system reactions. The BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. H. Web-based Graphics: A web server is to be supplied to supply access to graphic displays, the following screens shall be provided: 1. Floor Plan Screens: a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. Indicate the location of temperature sensors and VAV boxes, chilled beams, etc., associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHUs, etc.) on the floor plan screens. b. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen. c. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic. d. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens. e. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. 2. System Schematic Screens: a. Provide graphics for each air-handling system. Indicate OA temperature and relative humidity, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling system graphics. Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic. b. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the cursor. 1) Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 16 outputs shall be represented in terms of percent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic. c. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled. d. Provide a graphic for each hydronic system. e. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems. f. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. g. Link screens to all schedules and setpoints. I. Alarm Programming: Alarms shall be “intelligent” based upon the algorithms in this Section. 1. In general, alarm programming related to DDC controlled equipment should reside at the controller level along with the functional programming for equipment control. a. Intrinsic alarming associated with AI, AV, BI or BV objects (or any of the other 23 BACnet objects that support intrinsic alarming) shall only be used where the alarm is valid regardless of the state of the associated equipment or where there is a ready means for automatically suppressing alarm generation when the associated equipment is operationally secured. b. Alarm points shall be separate BACnet objects (e.g., BV or EEO) actuated by associated alarm programming. c. Alarm objects shall have descriptive BACnet object names. BACnet alarm object names shall end in “Alarm”. For detailed information on proper point naming conventions, see Cornell University Facility Services, Design and Construction Standards 15956 and Section 23 09 25 "Building Automation and Control System Communications and Interoperability." d. If it is necessary for the alarm to have latching functionality, the user shall be provided easy unlatching capability from within the DDC system if appropriate, taking into account equipment safety concerns. This is in addition to any local alarm reset. e. Alarms designated for monitoring by EMCS shall be set up in the DDC system to report to the EMCS alarm server. 2. Analog Deviation Alarms: Analog deviation alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and the controlled variable setpoint (whether calculated or fixed). a. When controlled variable deviates from setpoint above or below user adjustable high or low alarm thresholds, the alarm shall be activated. b. High and low alarm threshold values shall have associated adjustable deadbands (hysteresis values) for alarm clearing conditions as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm threshold or rises above the low alarm threshold. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays for active equipment operation. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 17 d. Alarm programming shall include startup delays to prevent nuisance alarms during equipment startup. e. Analog deviation alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured. 3. Analog High Limit Alarms: Analog high limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and a user adjustable high limit alarm value. a. When controlled variable rises above the user adjustable high limit, the alarm shall be activated. b. High alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value) for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm limit. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. d. High limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 4. Analog Low Limit Alarms: Analog low limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and a user adjustable low limit alarm value. a. When controlled variable falls below the user adjustable low limit, the alarm shall be activated. b. Low alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value) for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable rises above the low alarm limit. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. d. Low limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 5. Binary Run Status Alarms: Status alarms shall be based upon the comparison between run status and equipment command where applicable. a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. 6. Binary Alarming: Alarms shall be triggered upon associated BI changing state to the nonnormal or alarm state. a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. b. Binary alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 7. Steam Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Temperature Alarming: Steam shell and tube heat exchangers shall have two temperature alarms associated with them. a. Operational Supply Temperature Deviation Alarm when heat exchanger is in operation. b. High Supply Temperature Alarm that is always enabled whether or not the heat exchanger is operational or not, so as to monitor for steam control valve leak by. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 18 3.5 COMMISSIONING A. The BACS shall be fully commissioned. All acceptance testing, documentation, and training shall be required. B. The BACS contractor’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include the following: 1. Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of field commissioning activities. 2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and function contained within the BACS. 3. Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the subcontractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format. 4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any final acceptance testing. 5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per the requirements of the contract documents. 6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four weeks prior to the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing. 7. The BACS contractor shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 8. The BACS contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from Cornell. The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and verifying the operation of each control point. 9. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to Cornell. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the total system. 3.6 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of the control manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor. The amount of training that is provided shall match the size of the project (e.g., no less than eight hours for small projects and up to 80 hours for large projects). B. Contractor shall make available to the Owner regular, scheduled training courses for ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and softwareoriented courses as well as energy conservation and management courses. C. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility for four people. This training SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 19 only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products. If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again. 3.7 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner, and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. B. The period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of the work first performed after substantial completion by the period of time between substantial completion and the actual performance of the work. END OF SECTION 23 09 23 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 1 SECTION 23 09 25 - BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall govern the design and selection of equipment supplied to fulfill the requirements of this section: 1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter referred to as “BACnet,” American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2004. 2. B. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network. B. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. In addition to the definitions contained in the applicable standards of 1.03, the following should be noted: 1. ARCNET - Attached Resource Computer Network. See BACnet, Clause 8 and ATA/ANSI 878.1. 2. BACnet/IP - BACnet Annex J Devices. Annex J of BACnet describes how BACnet devices can make use of IP directly for communicating across IP-based internets. 3. BACnet PICS - A Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement that describes the BACnet capabilities of a specific device. See BACnet, Annex A. 4. BACS - Building Automation and Control System. 5. BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device. See BACnet, Annex J. 6. BMA - BACnet Manufacturers Association. 7. BTL - The BACnet Testing Laboratories of the BMA. The organization responsible for testing products to assure that they conform to the BACnet standard. Listings of tested products are available at www.bacnetassociation.org. 8. Campus Backbone - A fiber optic data communication infrastructure on the Cornell campus managed by CIT. Users connect to the backbone by means of CIT-supplied Ethernet concentrators in each building and appropriate 10/100BASE-T unshielded, SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 2 twisted pair wiring. The backbone uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for routing messages to and from computers both on and off the Cornell campus. 9. CIT - Cornell Information Technologies. The organization that manages the Cornell campus networking infrastructure, including the provision of network connections in Cornell buildings. 10. Computer Section - The computer group within the Cornell Utilities and Energy Management Department. The Computer Section is responsible for the EMCS and the coordination of BACS device addressing and network numbering. 11. BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block. A collection of one or more BACnet services defined for the purpose of describing communication functionality in an unambiguous way. See BACnet, Annex K. 12. Device Profile - A collection of BIBBs that describes the minimum BACnet capabilities of a particular device in order to achieve reliable communication in one of five specified “interoperability areas.” Devices include BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) and BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC). See BACnet, Annex L. 13. EMCS - A computer complex, housed at Chilled Water Plant 1 that provides Energy Management and Control System functions for the University. The EMCS is connected to the campus backbone and uses the IP for the routing of messages to and from individual buildings. 14. Ethernet - A carrier sensing multiple access with collision detection network technology defined by ISO/IEC 8802-3. 15. Gateway - A device that translates BACnet messages into those of a non-BACnet protocol and vice-versa. 16. Internetwork - A set of two or more BACnet networks interconnected by routers. 17. Interoperability Area - A communications domain in which functional cooperation is desired. These areas are currently: 1) data sharing; 2) alarm and event management; 3) trending; 4) scheduling; and 5) device and network management. See BACnet, Clause 22. 18. IP - The Internet Protocol. A networking protocol originally developed by the federal Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency. BACnet messages can traverse the campus backbone by being encapsulated in routable IP packets. 19. Local - Pertaining to the requirements of a specific job or building project. 20. LAN - Local Area Network. One of the approved BACnet network technologies: Ethernet, ARCNET or MS/TP. 21. MS/TP - Master-Slave/Token-Passing Network. One of the approved BACnet LANs. See BACnet, Clause 9. 22. Network - One of the communication technologies for data communications specified in BACnet. Approved network technologies at Cornell are Ethernet, ARCNET and MS/TP. 23. PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A document that describes in detail a device’s BACnet capabilities. See BACnet, Annex A. 24. UDP - The User Datagram Protocol. One of the IP family of protocols. UDP is used to convey BACnet/IP messages and is characterized by a “port number” for each protocol. BACnet/IP typically uses UDP port X'BAC0' or decimal 47808. 25. VLAN - Virtual Local Area Network. A network configuration that allows devices to communicate across multiple physical local area networks (LANs) using their hardware or “medium access control” (MAC) addresses as if they shared a common networking medium. As with a physical LAN, “local” broadcast messages are also propagated to each of the participating LANs. VLAN capability depends on the configuration of the SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 3 interconnecting data communication equipment. VLAN configuration is performed by CIT. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to any requirements specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall provide both proposed and as-built versions of the following: 1. Schematic drawings that represent the system architecture and configuration, in both hardcopy and editable electronic format. 2. A points list that includes, for each physical or logical point, the name, description, display units, alarm limits and definitions, along with the BACnet object description, object ID, and associated device ID. The list shall also indicate whether Trend Log or Schedule objects have been established for the point. 3. Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, or enumerations utilized detailing their structure, data types, and any associated lists of enumerated values. 4. PICS files indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of each device. In addition to the requirements of BACnet, Annex A, the Contractor shall provide information on any limitations on the numbers of supported objects in a given device including, specifically, Trend Log and Schedule objects. 5. Documentation on submitted products that have been tested and listed by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) or a letter on manufacturer’s company letterhead indicating the anticipated date by which testing is expected to be completed. If, for any reason, BTL testing and listing has not been completed, a written commitment shall be provided to upgrade installed controls to a version that meets BTL testing and listing requirements should deficiencies be found during BTL testing. 1.5 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination of subcontractors’ work relative to the BACS. Specific questions relating to communication and interoperability shall be submitted to the Computer Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Each networked device supplied pursuant to this Section shall be installed and configured so as to correctly execute all sequences of operation for its intended application, as defined in other Sections of these Specifications. In addition, each networked device shall provide, at a minimum, the BACnet communication capabilities prescribed in the device profiles for devices of its type. See Article 2.2. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 4 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. This clause prescribes the minimum requirements for devices supplied pursuant to this Section. 1. Controller Requirements: Controller devices supplied to meet the functional and operational requirements of this specification shall conform, at a minimum, to one the BACnet device profiles contained in BACnet, Annex L: BACnet Building Controller (BBC), BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) or BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interoperability requirements of such devices are contained in BACnet, Annex L. B-BC controller devices shall communicate using BACnet/IP. Other devices may use BACnet over ARCNET or BACnet over MS/TP. 2. Router Requirements: In the event that devices are provided that do not use BACnet/IP over Ethernet as their communication technology, BACnet routers shall be provided that route between BACnet/IP over Ethernet and the other BACnet LAN type(s), whether ARCNET or MS/TP. These routers shall conform to the specifications of BACnet, Clause 6. 3. Gateways: BACS devices that use BACnet as their native protocol are preferred. The use of gateways, in circumstances where no native BACnet devices are available, requires the specific approval of the Owner in each instance. 4. Workstation Requirements: The EMCS operator interface is the responsibility of the Computer Section. If, however, a specific job requires a local workstation, the Contractor shall provide a personal computer of current design and approved by the Owner equipped with a Web browser that can display information from a Contractor-supplied Web server that interfaces with the local BACnet network and the campus backbone, as described for below-specified web server requirements. 5. Web Server Requirements: If a local workstation is required, the Contractor shall comply with above-specified workstation requirements and shall, in addition, provide a Web server computer with the Web page presentation, data acquisition and storage functionality described in this Section, including the specific functions listed below. The Web server shall be configured in such a way that there is no software-imposed limit to the number of simultaneous users. a. Data Sharing: 1) Presentation of data (i.e., user-definable reports and graphics) 2) The ability to monitor and display the values of all BACnet object types, including all required and optional properties. 3) The ability to modify set points and parameters. b. Alarm and Event Management: 1) Operator notification and presentation of event information 2) Alarm acknowledgment by operators 3) Alarm summarization 4) Adjustment of alarm limits 5) Adjustment of alarm routing SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 5 c. Scheduling: 1) Modification of schedules 2) Display of the start and stop times (schedule) of scheduled devices. d. Trending: 1) Modification of the parameters of a trend log 2) Display and archive of trend log data e. Device and Network Management: 1) Display of information about the status of any device on the BACnet internetwork. 2) Display of information about any object on the BACnet internetwork. 3) Ability to silence a device on the network that is transmitting erroneous data. 4) Ability to cause a remote device to reinitialize itself. 5) Ability to backup and restore the configuration of devices on the local BACnet network. 6) Ability to query and change the configuration of local BACnet routers. 2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR NETWORK CONNECTIONS A. This clause prescribes the means of interconnecting BACS devices provided pursuant to this specification. 1. Local Area Networks (LANs) a. All control devices meeting the B-BC device profile shall be connected to an ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) LAN provided by the Contractor. This LAN, in turn, shall be connected to the campus backbone network. Unless otherwise specified, the connection shall be via a 10/100BASE-T port provided by the Owner. The location of the jack will be determined in consultation with the Computer Section, which will arrange with CIT for the jack's installation. The Contractor shall also provide any additional data communication hardware, such as hubs and repeaters, which may be needed to interconnect the supplied BACS equipment and to connect to the Owner's backbone network. b. To facilitate maintenance technician access to the LAN, the Contractor shall also provide at least one additional 10/100BASE-T access point in each mechanical room that contains BACS equipment. This requirement may be met by supplying either a hub with a spare port or a dedicated jack. c. Control devices that meet the B-ASC profile, but do not support Ethernet, must use another approved BACnet LAN technology. These technologies are ARCNET and MS/TP. If Ethernet is not supported on any part of the internet-work, a standalone BACnet router, or a BACnet Building Controller with built-in routing capability, must be provided for routing between the Ethernet and ARCNET or MS/TP LANs. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This clause provides specific interoperability and networking requirements that pertain to the use of BACnet. 3.2 REQUIREMENTS BY INTEROPERABILITY AREA A. This clause provides requirements pertaining to the five interoperability areas of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. 1. Data Sharing: Data Sharing requirements apply to the exchange of information between BACnet devices for archival storage, generating graphics and reports, the sharing of common sensor or calculated values, carrying out interlocked control strategies, and the modification of set points or other operational parameters. All such data to be exchanged shall be represented as BACnet objects and conveyed using BACnet messages. Only standard BACnet objects and messages may be used to implement data sharing requirements unless the non-standard extensions are explicitly approved by the Owner. Any extensions to BACnet shall be fully documented in the manner used within the BACnet standard. Submission of such documentation is a prerequisite for obtaining approval of an extension. a. Points List: The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with all points indicated in the BACS points list. The Contractor shall provide any additional points needed to fully implement the sequence of operations and other functionality described in this specification. b. Data Presentation: In the event that workstation/web server capabilities have been specified, the following characteristics shall apply to graphic displays: 1) The graphic displays shall include schematic diagrams of the systems being displayed. 2) When a graphic display is being viewed all values displayed shall be updated when a change of value (COV) notification is received or, if COV is not implemented, within five seconds. 3) Any data value from any networked device shall be available for plotting at a workstation in real time. The operator shall be able to select binary and analog data concurrently and to plot multiple instances of each data type on the same screen. The operator shall be able to select sampling intervals from 1 second to 60 seconds. For devices that implement COV reporting, the operator shall be able to select this as the means to update the plot. It shall be possible to save such real-time plots for subsequent recall. c. Monitoring of Any Property: The operator shall be able to display any value of any property of any object from any networked device including all properties required by BACnet, all supported optional properties, and any proprietary extensions. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 7 d. Global Object Definitions: The control system shall be configured with systemwide unique BACnet objects as needed to convey all globally significant information necessary to implement the control strategy. e. Set-Point and Parameter Modifications: Operators with appropriate authority shall be able to modify all control loop set points and tuning parameters via BACnet messages initiated through operator interaction with graphics displays. f. Peer-to-Peer Data Dependencies: All BACnet devices shall be installed and configured to exchange data values directly, without the need for operator or workstation intervention, to implement the sequence of operations specified in the mechanical system drawings and to share global data values. 2. Alarm and Event Management: a. Alarm and Event Management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the occurrence of predefined conditions that meet specific criteria. Such conditions are called “events” and may be the basis for the initiation of a particular control action in response or the simple logging of the event’s occurrence. The event may also be deemed to represent a condition that constitutes an “alarm” requiring human acknowledgment and intervention. b. All alarms and events shall be implemented using standard BACnet event detection and notification mechanisms. Either intrinsic reporting or algorithmic change reporting may be used but the intrinsic reporting method is preferred. See BACnet, Clause 13. c. Alarm Lists: 1) The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured to detect alarms and events for the points indicated in the system drawings. Software logic shall be provided to avoid nuisance alarms, e.g., no temperature or status alarms shall be generated when fan systems are not running or during start-up and shut-down transitions. It shall be possible to configure a delay between the occurrence of an alarm condition and its enunciation. 2) Alarms shall appear at the EMCS and any local operator workstation(s) within five seconds of their occurrence. The workstations shall display an alarm message window that appears on top of any other open windows. The alarm message window shall have a distinctive color and appearance to attract the operator's attention. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to configure the workstation to emit an audible signal (or not) when an alarm message is received. 3) Alarms that require operator acknowledgement shall cause the alarm window to remain active until such an acknowledgement is received. If multiple alarms are received, unacknowledged alarms shall be displayed on a first come first served basis grouped by priority, with the highest priority alarms displayed first. 4) Alarms shall be distributed using the BACnet notification class mechanism. Assignment of classes and destinations shall be configured according to details provided by the Owner. One destination shall, in all cases, be the EMCS. 5) BACnet provides a mechanism for prioritizing alarm and event notification messages using a numerical range of 0-255 with 0 being the highest priority SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 8 and 255 being the lowest priority. The priorities presented in the Table 1 are consistent with the safety requirements of UL 864 (applies to fire systems) and UL 1076 (applies to security systems). 6) Alarm and event notification priorities shall be configured in the Priority Range as indicated in Table 1 below and shall be conveyed using the indicated Network Priority. See BACnet, Clause 6. Table 1. Cornell Alarm and Event Priorities Message Group Priority Range Network Priority Brief Description Life Safety 00 - 31 Life Safety Message Notifications related to an immediate threat to life, safety or health such as fire detection or armed robbery. Property Safety 32 - 63 Life Safety Message Notifications related as an immediate threat to property such as forced entry. Supervisory 64 - 95 Critical Equipment Message Notifications related to improper operation, monitoring failure (particularly of Life Safety or Property Safety monitoring), or monetary loss. Trouble 96 - 127 Critical Equipment Message Notifications related to communication failure (particularly of Life Safety or Property Safety equipment). Miscellaneous Higher Priority Alarm and Events 128 - 191 Urgent Message Higher-level notifications related to occupant discomfort, normal operation, normal monitoring, or return to normal. Miscellaneous Lower Priority Alarm and Events 192 - 255 Normal Message Lower-level notification related to occupant discomfort, normal operation, normal monitoring, or return to normal. d. Alarm Acknowledgement: Alarms shall be acknowledged through the EMCS alarm acknowledgement process. e. Alarm Summarization: Alarm summarization shall be handled through the EMCS alarm summarization process. f. Alarm Parameter Adjustment: Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm parameters for all standard BACnet event types. g. Alarm Routing Adjustment: 1) Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm routing (BACnet notification classes) for each alarm including the destination for each type of alarm and alarm priority, the day of week and time of day, and the type of transition involved (TO-OFFNORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.). 2) Initially, notification classes shall be configured in a manner that distinguishes between the EMCS and any local workstation, if provided. 3. Scheduling: Scheduling is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the establishment and maintenance of dates and time at which specified output actions are to be taken. All schedules shall be implemented using BACnet objects and messages. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 9 a. Schedule Lists: 1) The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with start/stop, mode change, and night setback schedules as defined in the sequence of operations. As part of the installation process, the Contractor shall configure vacation, holiday, and any special event schedules as provided by the Owner. 2) The system shall have the ability to program alterations to programmed operating schedules based on the priority of events and shall include the following scenario: a) Based on operator privileges, the operator shall have the ability to temporarily override the programmed schedule of equipment. Operational override of a programmed schedule shall be for a specific duration following which the schedule shall revert back to the preprogrammed schedule. b. Display of Start and Stop Times and Actions: An operator shall be able to inspect the content of any schedule and determine the specific control actions that will occur at any time, on any date. For any particular device or system parameter that is the subject of a schedule, an operator shall be able to determine the schedule of actions related to that particular device or parameter. c. Modification of Schedules: All calendar entries and schedules shall be modifiable from the EMCS or local workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege. 4. Trending: Trending is the accumulation of (time, value) data pairs at specified rates for a specified duration. Trends are distinguished from real-time plotting of data by the fact that the data are destined for long-term storage. a. Archival Storage of Data: Archival storage of data will be handled by the EMCS. However, the Owner may specify local trend archiving and display through the use of BACnet Trend Log objects. b. Modification of Trend Log Parameters: An operator with sufficient privilege shall be able to change the data points to be logged, the sampling rate, and the duration of a trend log. 5. Device and Network Management: Device and network management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices concerning the operation and status of specific devices. If local workstation capabilities are provided, the following functions shall be available: a. Display of Device Status Information: Operators shall be able to display at any time the operational status of any device on the BACnet internetwork. b. Display of BACnet Object Information: Operators shall be able to display, at any time, any property of any BACnet object. Operators shall be able to display property values of objects grouped by object type, object location, and building system. c. Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data: Operators shall be able to direct a field device to stop transmitting event, alarm or COV notifications until a subsequent command to resume transmissions is received. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 10 d. Time Synchronization: Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any device on the network that supports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall be able to select to set the time and date for an individual device, or all devices on a single local network. e. Remote Device Reinitialization: Operators shall have the ability to issue reinitialization commands to any device that supports remote reinitialization. f. Backup and Restore: Operators shall have the ability to backup and restore all BACnet devices on the network that support this capability. g. Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs: Operators shall have the ability to display and modify the routing table entries in all supplied BACnet half-routers and routers and the broadcast distribution and foreign device registration tables in all BBMDs. 3.3 USE OF BACNET OBJECTS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the representation of data and functionality using BACnet objects. 1. Naming Conventions: The following sections list the requirements for the assignment of names and identifiers for BACnet objects: a. Device Names: 1) The EMCS uses a system for naming its control devices based on facility name, location within a facility, the system or systems that the device monitors and/or controls, or the area served. Names can be up to 254 characters in length, without embedded spaces. Only the characters A-Z, 09, ".", and "-" may be used. The goal is the shortest descriptive, but unambiguous, name. For example, if there is only one chilled water pump "P1", a valid name would be "DUFFIELD.CW.P1.CONTROL". 2) If there are two pumps designated "P1", one in the basement mechanical room and one in the penthouse mechanical room, the names could be "CHP.BSMT.CW.P1.CONTROL" or "CHP.PENT.CW.P1.CONTROL". In the case of unitary controllers, for example a VAV box controller, a name might be "COURT.122.TV-LOUNGE". These names should be used for the value of the "Object_Name" property of the BACnet Device objects of the controllers involved so that the BACnet name and the EMCS name are the same. b. Device Instance Numbers: 1) BACnet allows 4194305 device instances per BACnet internetwork, each of which must be unique. Cornell's unique device instances are formed as follows: Device Instance = "FFFFNDD" where: a) FFFF = Facility Code (see below) b) N = 0-9 This allows up to 10 networks per facility or building. c) DD = 00-99 This allows up to 100 devices per network. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 11 2) Facility Code assignments are currently: a) 0000-0999 Open b) 1000-1999 Statutory Facilities c) 2000-2999 Endowed Facilities d) 3000-3999 Housing and Dining Facilities e) 4000-4999 Off-Campus Facilities f) 5000-5999 Utilities 3) Some facilities have a facility code with an alphabetic suffix to denote wings, related structures, etc. The suffix will be ignored. Network numbers for facility codes above 4193 will be assigned in the range 0000-0999. 4) The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or confirmation, of the Facility Code to be used prior to beginning device configuration. c. Non-Device Object Names: Objects other than Device objects shall be named in a manner analogous to Device objects. The names shall consist of a facility.[subfacility.]system.[sub-system.]point designation. d. Non-Device Object Instance Numbers: The instance numbers for objects other than Device objects may be assigned at the Contractor’s discretion subject only to the constraint that they be unique for a given object type within a given device. 2. Commissioning/Diagnostic Mode: In order to support commissioning and troubleshooting functions, the Out_Of_Service property of all Analog, Binary, Multistate, Loop, and Program objects shall be writable using BACnet services. 3. Using Object Descriptions: a. Each device object and every object in BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) shall be configured with a Description property. The descriptions used shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. b. For all object types in all devices that support Description properties, the available string length and whether or not the Description is writable using BACnet services shall be specified in the device’s PICS. 4. Issues Relating to Specific BACnet Object Types: This clause provides requirements that pertain to the use of specific BACnet object types. a. Analog Input, Output, and Value: All Analog_Input, Analog_Output, and Analog_Value objects shall have the capability of using the change of value (COV) reporting mechanism and the COV_Increment property shall be writable using BACnet services. b. Binary Input: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Input objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. Binary Input objects shall support COV reporting. c. Binary Output: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Output objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. All Binary Output objects associated with motor on/off status shall track changes of state and runtime. Binary Output objects shall support COV reporting. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 12 d. Binary Value: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Value objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. Binary Value objects shall support COV reporting. e. Calendar: 1) Devices providing scheduling capability shall also provide at least one Calendar object with a capacity of at least ten entries. Operators shall be able to view the calendar object and make modifications from any BACnet workstation on the network. 2) If the Calendar’s Date_List property is writable using BACnet services, all calendar entry data types shall be supported. f. Loop: All control loops using any combination of proportional, integral, and/or derivative control shall be represented by BACnet Loop objects. Operators with sufficient authority shall be able to adjust at least the Update_Interval, Setpoint, Proportional_Constant, Integral_Constant, and Derivative_Constant using BACnet services. Loop objects shall support COV reporting. g. Multi-state Input, Output, and Value: The text to be used for the Multi-state object types shall be determined from the points list. Feedback_Value shall be determined by sensing the actual condition or mode of the device. All Multi-state objects shall support COV reporting. h. Schedule: All building systems with date and time scheduling requirements shall have schedules represented by BACnet Schedule objects. All operators shall be able to view the entries for a schedule. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to modify schedule entries from any BACnet workstation. Required schedules are shown on the drawings as part of the occupied and unoccupied modes. 5. Dynamic Object Creation: BACnet Building Controllers shall be configured to allow the dynamic creation of Trend Log, Calendar, and Schedule objects by means of the BACnet Create Object service. This shall be possible from any supplied BACnet workstation by operators with appropriate authority. 3.4 USE OF BACNET SERVICES A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet communication services. 1. Interoperable Commands : All dampers, valves, fans, or other mechanical equipment that may need to be controlled by more than one application shall be represented as commandable BACnet objects. The application programs interacting with this equipment shall be configured to use the command priorities listed in Table 2. If implementing the sequence of operations or other required functionality requires using a command priority not listed in Table 2, the priority assignment must be approved by the Owner. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 13 Table 2. Cornell Command Priorities Priority Level Application Priority Level Application 1 Manual-Life Safety 9 Available 2 Automatic-Life Safety 10 Available 3 Available 11 Load Shedding 4 Available 12 Available 5 Critical Equipment Control 13 Available 6 Minimum On/Off 14 Available 7 Available 15 Available 8 Manual Operator 16 Available 2. Alarming: This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet for alarm processing. a. Alarm Priorities: All alarm and event notification priorities shall be configured as indicated in 3.02.B.1. b. Notification Classes: 1) The EMCS shall be designated as a recipient for all alarm notifications. 2) The Priority, Ack_Required, and Recipient_List properties of Notification Class objects shall be writable over the network using BACnet services. c. Event Notification Message Texts: Alarm and event processing shall be configured to convey descriptive text messages along with the notification. 3. Operator Authority Levels: If local workstation capability is provided, there shall be at least three levels of authority: a. Administrator - All privileges b. Control Shop - All programming and configuration c. Building Coordinator - Read only 4. Change of Value Processing: a. All local workstations shall be able to display property values based on the receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of Value notifications. Operators shall have the ability from any workstation to subscribe to COV notifications for all objects that support COV subscriptions. b. After initialization, all graphic display screens shall update the displayed values using COV notifications if COV notification capabilities are available from the data source. c. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an operator using BACnet services. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 14 3.5 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the integration of multiple BACnet networks, possibly on different LAN types, into a single BACnet internetwork. 1. Network Numbering: a. Cornell BACnet network numbers are based on a "facility code, network" concept. The "facility code" is the Cornell-assigned numeric value assigned to a specific facility or building. See 3.03.A.2 above. The "network" typically corresponds to a "floor" or other logical configuration within the building. BACnet allows 65535 network numbers per BACnet internetwork. b. Cornell’s network numbers are thus formed as follows: Network Number = "FFFFN" where: 1) FFFF = Facility Code 2) N = 0-9 This allows up to 10 networks per facility or building. 3) N = 0 will generally be assigned to a facility’s BACnet Ethernet LAN. Normally, this network is connected to the campus backbone. The additional N-numbers will be assigned to any ARCNET or MS/TP networks as required. c. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or confirmation, of the Network Number(s) to be used prior to beginning device configuration. 2. IP Address Assignments: a. Cornell maintains specially configured VLANs for the purpose of securely transporting BACS communication traffic. Address assignments are coordinated by the Computer Section. b. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment of IP addresses (and possibly non-standard UDP ports) prior to beginning device configuration. 3.6 BACNET ROUTERS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet routers. 1. Error Message Destination: The Contractor shall configure each BACnet router to transmit network layer (routing) error messages to the EMCS. END OF SECTION 23 09 25 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 1 SECTION 23 21 13 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following: 1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Condensate-drain piping. 4. Air-vent piping. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Piping application schedule. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Other building services. 3. Structural members. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type Land ASTM B 88, Type M. B. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. C. Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Viega LLC. 2. Housing: Copper. 3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 5. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F. D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM B 16.9, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASME 16.9, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. G. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 3 a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Monolithic type with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Matco-Norca. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. e. Wilkins. f. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solderjoint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 4 c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Description: a. Non-conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. D. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Matco-Norca. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. b. Electroplated steel nipple, complying with ASTM F 1545. c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Chilled Water: Pipe Size Pipe Fittings Joint 2.5 inches and smaller ASTM B 88 Type L Hard Copper ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper ASTM B 32 Solder 95 Sn/5 Sb 95.5 Sn/4 cu/0.5 Ag SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 5 B. Heating Hot Water: C. Cooling-Coil Condensate Drain: 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. Pipe Size Pipe Fittings Joint 2.5 inches and smaller ASTM B 88 Type L Hard Copper ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper ASTM B 32 Solder 95 Sn/5 Sb 95.5 Sn/4 cu/0.5 Ag 2 inches and smaller ASTM B 88 Type L Hard Copper ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper ASME B16.22 Copper Pressure Seal EPDM Sealing Element Pipe Size Pipe Fittings Joint All sizes ASTM B 88 Type L Hard Copper ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper ASTM B 32 Solder 95 Sn/5 Sb 95.5 Sn/4 cu/0.5 Ag 1.25 inches and larger ASTM B 3026 Type DWV ASME B16.29 Wrought Copper, DWV ASTM B 32 Solder 95 Sn/5 Sb 95.5 Sn/4 cu/0.5 Ag SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 6 J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and brass hose connection with cap and chain, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Section 23 05 23. Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. T. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping. 3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 7 B. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet. 6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet. C. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. D. Support vertical runs at each floor and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 8 G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly. 3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install pressure/temperature test port at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply with Section 23 21 16, "Hydronic Piping Specialties." 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components; repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 9 C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 23 21 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 21 16 - 1 SECTION 23 21 16 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Air vents. 2. Strainers. 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Pressure/temperature test ports. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Hydronic specialties. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 21 16 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual Air Vents: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. d. Taco, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze. 3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 7. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. 2.2 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.3 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PORTS A. Extended body style to allow for insulation thickness. B. Seals shall be appropriate for operating water temperature and pressure as follows: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 21 16 - 3 1. Hot Water, Glycol: Nordel seat. 2. Cold Water, Chilled Water: Neoprene seat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, heat pumps, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Pressure/temperature test ports shall be provided on each coil bank, heat exchanger, fan-coil, chilled beam, and at all permanent pressure-gauge locations. END OF SECTION 23 21 16 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1 SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Double-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 3. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 4. Sheet metal materials. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Duct liner. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. All ductwork and plenums shall be constructed to SMACNA Seal Class "A." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 13. Provide 1/4-inch-scale coordinated Shop Drawings for mechanical equipment rooms and all supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in all spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 3 C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for the inner duct. B. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 4 E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation. 3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. 4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1. F. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch perforated galvanized sheet steel having 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent. G. Formed-on Transverse Joints (Flanges): Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Traverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." H. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Traverse joints shall be made with couplings and two-part tape sealing system. 2. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 5 C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.5 DUCT LINER A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." Duct dimensions shown on Drawings are inside dimensions. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 6 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. 4. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 7 a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm or where indicated. 9. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. 2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 8 D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 9 B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths, with sheet-metal couplings. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. I. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. J. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. After fabrication and prior to installation, seal ends of ductwork with shrink-wrap. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. All ductwork and plenums shall be constructed to SMACNA "Seal Class A." All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed to Class A regardless of specified pressure class. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 10 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, and Fire/Smoke Dampers: Duct connections shall be sealed. F. Terminal Units: Longitudinal seams of casings, inlet face of casings, and inlet collars shall be sealed with mastic. G. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 11 2. Test the following systems: a. All ductwork within duct enclosures above the roof, regardless of duct classification. Complete testing, and submit report prior to installation of the roof of the enclosure. b. Ducts with a Pressure Class Lower than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area. c. Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3-Inch wg or Higher: Test all ductwork. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. a. Systems Designed to Operate at 3-Inch w.c. and Below: 25 percent of the duct system shall be tested. The consultant/Owner shall randomly choose the sections of ductwork to be tested during the construction phase. If any of the original sections fail the leakage test, another 25 percent of the duct shall be chosen to be tested. If any section of the second 25 percent fails, the entire system shall be leaktested. b. Systems Designed to Operate in Excess of 3-Inch w.c.: The entire system shall be leak-tested. c. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the SMACNA's "Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." d. Leakage testing shall be witnessed by representative from Cornell University and the Project Engineer of record. 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. 7. Acceptable criteria for duct leakage tests: a. Interior Supply, Return, and General Exhaust Systems: 5 percent leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. b. Interior Laboratory Exhaust Systems: 2 percent system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. c. For systems not covered above, consult Chapter 19 of the "2012 ASHRAE HVAC System and Equipment Handbook of Recommendation," with final approval by Facilities Engineer. C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 12 D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated duct. Patch insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Comply with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 13 4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 3.8 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Downstream of Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative under 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. 2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive above 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. B. Liner: 1. Return-Grille Sound Traps: Fibrous glass, Type 1, 1-1/2 inches thick. C. Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation: 1. Supply-Air Ducts: 1-1/2 inches thick. 2. Return-Air Ducts: 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 14 a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 31, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. E. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 23 31 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1 SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Flange connectors. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct-mounted access doors. 5. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Access Doors: The manufacturer shall submit documentation of leakage tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-D. C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and polished stainless-steel finish for exposed ducts. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Ruskin Company. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 3 g. Trox USA Inc. h. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel to match system requirements. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized- or stainless-steel to match system material, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel, stainless steel, or nonferrous metal to match system material. 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze or oil-impregnated stainless-steel sleeve to match system material. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 4 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. SEMCO Incorporated. 6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Double wall. 2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Ventfabrics, Inc. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 5 c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts. C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from control dampers and equipment. 3. Control devices requiring inspection. 4. Elsewhere as indicated. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 6 F. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. G. Access Door Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. H. Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. J. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. Submit a field report for verification of fire and smoke damper operation. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 23 33 00 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 1 SECTION 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Variable-volume air terminal units. 2. Critical environment control valve. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including sound power data. B. The manufacturer shall submit documentation of leakage test reports performed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 130. C. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up." SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE-VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier. 2. Trane. 3. Price. B. Leakage shall not exceed 4.5 cfm when test against a 1.0-inch w.c. pressure differential. C. Completely factory-assembled unit shall consist of an insulated plenum with air-inlet collar, airvolume damper, flow sensor, and removable access panel. D. Unit casing shall be constructed of double-wall galvanized steel with 1/2-inch-thick, 2.0-pcf (minimum), dual-density, thermal/acoustic glass-fiber insulation between walls. Insulation material not to exceed NFPA 90A smoke- and flame-spread-rating recommendations and to meet UL 181 anti-erosion requirements. Double-wall construction shall have 26-gauge galvanized steel liner on the air-side surface of the insulation for complete metal encapsulation. E. Air-volume dampers shall be factory-calibrated damper mechanism. Provide without mechanical stops. F. Air-volume controls shall be electric by means of an externally mounted 24-V actuator, positioning the damper. Damper shall be normally closed. G. Unit controllers and damper actuators are to be furnished by BACs subcontractor for installation by unit manufacturer. H. Air-volume limits shall be field adjustable to allow for future changes in unit airflow rates. Air- volume limits will be based on the minimum pressure drop rating for the damper unit. For damper with reset units, the minimum and maximum limits will be set at the reset device. I. Each unit to be clearly marked with identification label and airflow indicator. Label shall include model number, cfm, coil type, etc. J. Hot-water heating coils shall be factory-mounted to unit in galvanized casing. Aluminum fins shall be bonded to copper tubes. Coil to be leak-tested at 250-psi hydrostatic pressure. K. Box sound power levels shall be as scheduled. Sound power-level rating of units shall be in accordance with ADC Standard 1062. 2.2 CRITICAL ENVIRONMENT CONTROL VALVE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 3 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. 2. Phoenix Controls Corporation. 3. Price Industries. 4. Tuttle & Bailey; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. B. Description: Volume-damper or venturi assembly inside a unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud, for general exhaust applications or for exhaust applications where pressurization control via exhaust and supply airflow control is desired and airstream corrosion and contamination may be a concern. C. Casing: 1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. D. Airflow Metering, Option: Calibrated shaft position with self-adjusting, spring-loaded cone. E. Sensors, Option: Multipoint, Type 316 stainless steel, removable. F. Direct Digital Controls: 1. Terminal Unit Controller, Section 230923: Controller is to be factory mounted and wired by air terminal manufacturer; unit controller, actuators, and room sensors are to be furnished under Section 230923 "Building Automation Control System." G. Control Sequence: See Drawings for control sequences. 2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Air-Terminal-Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 4 1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick. C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance. B. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Section 23 21 13 "Hydronic Piping," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange. C. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts." D. Arrange inlet duct connection with the required length of straight duct section as required by unit manufacturer to achieve accurate readings at flow sensor. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 5 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units. END OF SECTION 23 36 00 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 1 SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed-face register. 2. Louver-face diffuser. 3. Linear slot diffuser. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following or approved equal: 1. Price. 2. Anemostat. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 2 2.2 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS A. Fixed-Face Register RA: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core. 4. Core Construction: Removable. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Face: 24 by 24 inches with blank-offs to reduce grille opening to 12 by 12 inches where indicated on Drawings. 7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. B. Louver-Face Diffuser SA: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Mounting: Surface or T-bar—refer to Drawings. 6. Pattern: Adjustable core style. 7. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. 8. Accessories: a. Square to round neck adaptor. b. Adjustable pattern vanes. c. Throw reducing vanes. d. Equalizing grid. e. Plaster ring. f. Safety chain. g. Wire guard. h. Sectorizing baffles. i. Operating rod extension. C. Linear Slot Diffuser SB: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 2. Material - Shell: Aluminum. 3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum. 4. Finish - Face: Special finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's catalog. 5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black. 6. Slot Width: 1/2 inch. 7. Number of Slots: Three. 8. Length: 48 inches. 9. Accessories: Plenum, frame, and end caps as required for mounting in architectural metal ceiling. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 3 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers and registers level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 23 37 13 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer's authorized service representative. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Cerro Wire LLC. 5. Encore Wire Corporation. 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Republic Wire Inc. 8. Southwire Company. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with applicable ASTM specifications for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type USE-2: Comply with UL 854. 2. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 3. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3 3. Gardner Bender. 4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 5. Ideal Industries, Inc. 6. ILSCO. 7. NSi Industries LLC. 8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 9. TE Connectivity Ltd. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Branch Circuits: Copper. Stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger. B. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Stranded for No. 14 AWG and smaller. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Provide supports according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 26 05 19 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Electrical equipment grounding and bonding. 2. Communications equipment grounding and bonding. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 5. ILSCO. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 7. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. C. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. D. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron. E. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. F. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 14 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 12 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 3 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for electrical raceways and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for raceways, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and system contents. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Hangers. b. Steel slotted support systems. c. Trapeze hangers. d. Equipment supports. 2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 2 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Speakers. c. Access panels. d. Projectors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635. 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Flex-Strut Inc. e. GS Metals Corp. f. G-Strut. g. Haydon Corporation. h. Metal Ties Innovation. i. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. j. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. k. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Material: Galvanized steel. 3. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches. 4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA4. 5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 3 6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 8. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 4 transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 4. In-wall storage boxes for audio-visual systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For all products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Southwire Company. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 10. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 11. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. I. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3 C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. MonoSystems, Inc. 11. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 12. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 13. Plasti-Bond. 14. RACO; Hubbell. 15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. I. Gangable boxes are allowed. J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. K. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 2.4 IN-WALL STORAGE BOX FOR AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide Chief "PAC526FW" and "PAC526FCW" or approved equal. 1. Refer to Drawings to quantities of each. B. Equipment storage box recessed in-wall for audio visual equipment, typically installed behind a wall-mounted flat panel display. Power outlet (not included with product), conduit, and data network jacks (not included with product) typically attached to/installed inside box. Flange for edge trim included. Contractor providing in-wall box shall also provide specified power outlets, data jacks, conduit connections, and other accessories necessary to install the in-wall box. AV Contractor shall provide AV connectors. C. Color: White. D. Switch Boxes for Electrical Outlet or Data Network Jacks: 1. Available Product: RACO #560. 2. 2.75 inches deep. E. Acoustic Putty: 1. Available Product: Kinetics Noise Control IsoBacker. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5 F. Accessories: 1. Provide all fasteners, hardware, anchors, brackets, and other components to ensure complete, functional, and secure installation of all products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Mechanical rooms. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel or nonmetallic in wet locations. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6 B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. P. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 7 2. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. Q. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated. S. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. T. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. U. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. V. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. W. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. X. In-Wall Storage Box for Audio-Visual Systems: 1. General: a. Install all systems to comply with NFPS Section 70 National Electric Code, and local/state codes, ordinances, regulations, recommendations, guidelines and directives, in a manner which complies with accepted industry standards of good practice, the requirements of this specification, and in a manner which does not constitute a life or physical safety hazard. b. Comply with manufacturer’s written data and specifications, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions, and technical data sheets. c. Install all products at locations and heights indicated on Drawings. d. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. e. Metal raceway shall be electrically continuous and bonded in accordance with the National Electric Code for proper grounding. f. Raceway systems shall be mechanically continuous and connected to all electrical outlets, boxes, device mounting brackets, and cabinets, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation sheets. g. All products described in this specification shall be installed plumb and square unless specifically detailed otherwise. h. All supports shall meet or exceed the load requirements of the intended application with a minimum safety factor of five. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 8 i. Where penetrations of fire-rated assemblies are involved, the Contractor shall seal penetrations with appropriate firestopping systems in accordance with Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." j. The Contractor shall investigate the presence of post-tension rods before drilling into concrete floors/ceilings. 2. In-wall box interior shall remain open and clear of obstructions to allow for installation of audio-visual system devices. This includes but is not limited to power outlets, data network jacks, and conduit stubs. In accordance with manufacturer instructions, power outlets and data network jacks shall be installed on the outside of the in-wall box facing inward. 3. In-wall box shall be secured to the building structure per manufacturer instructions. Conduit shall not bear the weight of the in-wall box. 4. Conduit shall terminate on the in-wall box. No free air cable runs from conduit to box. 5. Included flange shall be installed to conceal rough-cut of finished wall material. 6. Conduit containing AC power cables shall terminate at the in-wall box on the opposite side of the box from conduit containing low voltage audio visual system cables. 7. Conduit ends shall not have sharp edges, or have an insulated bushing installed to protect wire pulls from damage. 8. Conduit to the in-wall box intended for low-voltage audio-visual systems may not be shared by other trades or services, except by written consent from the Owner’s Representative. 9. Do not install in-wall storage boxes back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6-inch separation. Install with minimum 24-inch separation in acoustic-rated walls. 10. In-wall box shall be installed flush with finished wall material. 11. Acoustical treatment to be installed behind in-wall storage box: The complete outside surface of each of these in-wall storage boxes shall be treated with acoustical putty. 12. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate with AV Contractor for installation of AV connectors in-wall boxes. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1 SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for conductors. 2. Warning labels and signs. 3. Equipment identification labels. 4. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2 B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 3. Arc Flash Protection Label: a. Items: Arc Flash Protection Label. b. Type: Format 9. c. Color: White on red header/black on white body. d. Height: 5 inches. e. Width: 7 inches. f. Legend: “DANGER – ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD, APPROPRIATE PPE REQUIRED, HAZARD CATEGORY -1.” g. Material: Write-on vinyl with acrylic adhesive. 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. C. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. D. Stenciled Legend: In non-fading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 3 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning labels. 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 2. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. B. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 11/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4 c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Specifications for data outlets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. C. Comply with NFPA 70. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES A. Where Basis-of-Design Product is indicated below, provide named product or approved equal by one of the following Bryant, Cooper (Arrow-Hart), Hubbell, P&S, or Leviton. Provide one manufacturer for each category, for entire Project. B. Receptacles–General Usage: 1. General Requirements: Duplex, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding. a. 20 Amp, 125 volts, 60 Hz. b. NEMA configuration: 5-20R. c. Parallel-blade, double-wipe contacts; NEMA grounding slot. d. UL-listed and meeting Federal Specification WC596. 2. Standard: a. Quick-connect “plugtail” type. b. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT5362 series. 3. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs), Specification grade, feed through a. Trip level: 4 to 6 mA; trip time: .025 second nominal. b. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT2095 series. 4. TVSS: a. Same as paragraph 3 above except TVSS. 5. Duplex tamper-resistant receptacles with two USB charging ports, 15-A rating. a. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #TMB26USBLACC6. 6. Special-Purpose Receptacles: a. Sizes and NEMA ratings as indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Wall Plates: 1. Interior for Recessed Outlet Boxes: a. Finished Spaces: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 1) Brushed aluminum. 2) Single multi-gang plate for multiple devices at one location. 3) Manufacturer: Same as devices. 2. Interior for Surface Steel Outlet Boxes: a. Galvanized sheet steel; rounded edges. b. Single multi-gang plate for multiple devices at one location. c. Manufacturer: Appleton, General Electric, Pyle National, Steel City, Universal. 3. Weatherproof: a. GFCI receptacle, with cover; wet location-rated while in use. Provide at all exterior locations, at all interior wet locations, and as indicated on Contract Drawings. b. Manufacturers: Taymac, Carlon, P&S. 2.2 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Grey. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency/Standby Power System: Red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. 1. Duplex Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor to centerline. 2. Outlets above Counter: 42 inches above finished floor; coordinate with Architectural elevations and counter installation. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4 C. The location of any device box may be changed a distance of 10 feet from starting location before device is actually installed, at no extra charge. D. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. E. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. F. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. G. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates. 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 5 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units, and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 1 SECTION 27 15 00 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Cable connecting hardware. 3. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 4. Cabling system identification products. B. Scope of Work: 1. Provide all necessary computer-data-distribution-system cabling and other associated devices, components, and accessories as required for the system specified herein and as indicated in the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide horizontal copper cabling and outlets. 3. Provide Category 6 data jacks and Category 6, unshielded, twisted-pair, copper cables to Category 6 voice/data outlets (RJ45). 4. Provide Category 6A data jacks and Category 6A, unshielded, twisted-pair, copper cable for each wireless access point. 5. Remove all existing unused cabling back to source. 6. Cable trays and pull boxes shall remain accessible. 7. Coordinate any disruptions in service with Cornell University CIT and building-area occupants. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. D. LAN: Local area network. E. Outlet: A connecting point in the work area on which horizontal cable terminates to a jack. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 2 F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 REFERENCES A. The following industry standards are the basis for ALL of the structured cabling described in this document. This includes the most recent revision of TIA standards for Category 6/6A Cable Installation and Testing, Pathways and Spaces, and Grounding. The list is incorporated by this reference to them. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, the order below shall dictate the order of precedence in resolving the issue unless an enforceable local or national code is in effect. Note that specific reference is made to both the EIA/TIA 568-B.2.1 standard for category 6 cabling and the EIA/TIA 568-B.3 standard for fiber optics. 1. TIA/EIA—Pertinent Sections 2. TIA/EIA-568-B and B3, Commercial Building Telecommunication Cabling Standard 3. TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunication Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 4. TIA/EIA-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements 5. TIA/EIA-569-A, Commercial Building Standards for Telecom Pathways and Spaces 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA-70 National Electric Code (NEC) – 2002 (or later edition) 7. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations. 8. OSHA (Standards 29 CRF) Telecommunications – 1910.268. 9. Underwriters Laboratory. B. National Electrical Safety Code Board of Fire Underwriters inspection is required for all new electrical construction work. Specific Cornell Fire and Safety requirements must be met. In the event of conflict between or among such codes/requirements, the more stringent will apply. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. At the time of Shop Drawings, submit applicable manufacturer’s literature, Shop Drawings, and Product Data to confirm the conformance to the Contract Documents. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 3 B. Product Data for each component specified including detailed manufacturer specifications. Include data on features, ratings, and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components as needed. Show access and working-space requirements. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transmission media certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements and that they have been coordinated with and accepted by manufacturer of connected equipment. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification at time of contract award. No projection of certifications will be accepted. E. Collect and submit any accompanying identification attached to every master reel of unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. F. Submit, prior to testing, the most recent calibration reports for all testing devices used by the contractor performing the testing. Calibration reports older than those recommended by the cabling or device manufacturer will be rejected. G. Submit a label example, pertaining to this project, for approval prior to printing bulk labels. H. Final schedule of cables as specified in Part 3. I. As-Built Drawings: 1. As-built Contract Drawing shall be delivered to the Owner 2 weeks prior to occupancy for each Project phase. A set of as-built drawings shall be provided to the Owner in electronic CAD software that is acceptable to the Owner. Provide as-built drawings with locations, cable paths, and cable schedule for Cornell University (CU) cable records. J. Project Record Drawings: 1. Submit at conclusion of the Project and include: a. Approved Shop Drawings. b. Plan Contract Drawings indicating locations and identification of work area outlets, nodes, closets, and backbone (riser) cable runs. c. Cross-connect schedules including entrance point, main cross-connects, intermediate cross-connects, and horizontal cross-connects. d. Labeling and administration documentation. e. Warranty documents for equipment. f. Copper certification test result printouts and CD. g. Operation and maintenance manuals. K. Test Reports--General: 1. Provide a complete system test report (bound) of the complete existing data network at each building prior to starting work. 2. Provide a complete system test report (bound) of the additions and revisions to the existing data network. After the report is acceptable, upon Engineer’s review, the report SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 4 shall be included in the Division 27 O&M manual. Also, the acceptable test report shall be submitted to the on compact disk in PDF format. 3. Refer to Article 3.6 of this Section for additional information. L. The Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings, product data, and samples shall not relieve the Division 27 Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, product data, and samples. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections, and incidental items necessary to fully complete the work under this Contract for use, occupancy, and operation by the Owner. B. Unless specifically otherwise indicated by the documents or the CM/Owner, all equipment and materials required for installation under these specifications shall be new, unused, and without blemish or defect. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the Authorities having jurisdiction over the work and as specified hereinbefore. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products listed and/or labeled by FM or UL or another testing laboratory, the products shall be so listed and/or labeled. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated, a first-class standard article shall be provided. C. Where equipment of a substitute manufacturer differ from that specified and require different arrangement or connections from those shown or specified, it is the responsibility of the Contractor responsible for the substitution to modify the installation of the equipment/system to operate properly and in harmony with the original intent of the drawings and specifications. When directed by the Architect, this Contractor shall submit drawings showing the proposed substitute installation. If the proposed installation is accepted this Contractor shall make all necessary changes in all affected related work provided under his and other Sections including roughing-in connections by other Trades, conduits, supports, etc. All changes shall be made at no increase to the Contract amount or additional costs to the Owner. D. Contractor/Subcontractor Qualifications: The Contractor/Subcontractor shall have at least one Registered Communications Distribution Designer, RCDD, on staff that must be certified by the Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI). Cabling installation shall be performed by a minimum of two installers and all installers performing the Work of this Contract shall be manufacturer-certified installers with proof of a current certification. All installers must be approved by the Owner prior to contract award. E. Contractor/Subcontractor shall be Corning EWP-certified for at least 6 months at time of bid for fiber-optic installations. Evidence of this certification must be presented to Owner with bid submission. F. Contractor/Subcontractor shall be part Panduit-certified for copper horizontal cabling installations. Evidence of this certification must be presented to Owner with bid submission. G. Fiber-optic-trained technicians shall have attended an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof shall execute the fiber-optic tests. Such certificates may have been issued by any of the following organizations or an equivalent organization: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 5 1. The manufacturer of the fiber-optic cable and/or the fiber-optic connectors, 2. The manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field certification, 3. Training organizations authorized by BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Services International with headquarters in Tampa, Florida) or by the ACP (Association of Cabling Professionals™) Cabling Business Institute located in Dallas, Texas. H. Inspect every cable reel to confirm that the cable manufacturer has ISO9001 certification, that there are no factory splices in any reel, and that only virgin materials were used in the manufacturing of each reel. Reject any reels that do not comply with these criteria. I. Cable manufacturers shall be ISO 9001 registered. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Attention is directed to provisions of the General Requirements regarding the warranties for work under this contract. B. All materials, items of equipment, and workmanship furnished under this Section shall carry the standard warranty against all defects in material and workmanship. Any fault due to defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship, or design that may develop shall be made good, forthwith, by, and at the expense of this contractor for the work under his contract including all other damage to areas, materials, and other systems resulting from this failure. C. Materials and labor supplied will be warranted against defects for a period of not less than one year following final acceptance. Materials, equipment, and cable installations found to be defective, as judged by the Owner, within the one-year period will be replaced by the contractor at no charge to the Owner. The contractor is required to respond to a repair call no later than the next business day. D. Provide cable manufacturer's warranty naming CIT/Infrastructure Engineering as the Owner. 1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Project before, during, and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Use all means necessary to coordinate with other trades and ensure that proper and adequate provision is made in the work of other Sections to accommodate installations of the work of this Section. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 6 B. Adjust the arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects in telecommunication rooms to accommodate and optimize the arrangement and space requirements of the telephone switch and LAN equipment. C. Coordinate with and obtain review of cable characteristics and certification for use with the connected system equipment by the connected equipment manufacturers. D. Collect and submit any accompanying identification, if any, attached to every master reel of unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. Inspection of every reel should confirm that the cable manufacturer has ISO9001 certification, that there are no factory splices in any reel, and that only virgin materials were used in the manufacturing of each reel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet from data room rack to outlet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet for patch cords and service loops. B. Cable slack shall be provided at each end of each cable to accommodate future work-area changes. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-D when tested according to test procedures of this standard. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A and NFPA 70. 2.3 UTP CABLE A. Category 6 Cable: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CommScope "Systimax" #1071E or comparable product by one of the following: a. BerkTek Lanmark #XTP. b. Panduit GenSpeed #6000. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 7 B. Category 6A Cable: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CommScope "Systimax" #1091B or comparable product by BerkTek Lanmark #XTP. 2.4 CABLE HARDWARE A. Outlet Faceplates: 1. Work-area faceplates shall be compatible with modular jack inserts iconable and ivory in color. Faceplates shall have a covered designation strips that allow identifying each jack. Provide inserts that orient outlets to accept jack inserts at 45-degree exit. a. Product—No Substitution: Panduit "Mini-Com Executive" series #CBEEI. b. Refer to Contract Drawings for exact quantity, number of ports required, and location of faceplates. 2. Blanks shall be installed to all unused openings. B. Category 6 Jacks and Inserts: 1. TIA 568A termination procedures shall be observed. Verify with Owner’s Representative prior to install. 2. Cable jacket shall be maintained to the point of termination. 3. Pair twists shall be maintained to within .5" of termination. 4. Excessive slack shall be removed from cables so as to avoid overcrowding behind faceplates and exceeding recommended bend radius. 5. Product—No Substitution: Panduit #CJ688TG. C. Category 6A Modular Jacks: 1. Product—No Substitution: Panduit #CJ6X88TG, T568A modular jack for Cat. 6A cables. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHODS A. Conceal cables in raceway. SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 8 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install TG termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. 5. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 6. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable. Horizontal cable shall route in front/rear vertical and horizontal cable managers. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. B. Label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and CIT Infrastructure standards. C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 9 horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner. E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Identification within Connector Fields in Wiring Closet: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. 4. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label. F. Label each outlet using the CU labelling convention: Room number-alpha (clockwise around room)-port; e.g., 101-A1, 2. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022SNEE1149-BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 10 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network. B. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 27 15 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS - SNEE 1149.docTABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SECTION 02 82 00 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 – METALS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 41 13 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS SECTION 06 44 00 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07 84 43 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07 92 19 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS SECTION 08 14 33 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 88 13 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING DIVISION 09 – FINISHES SECTION 09 01 90.52 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 09 77 23 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 36 61.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 23 – HVAC SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUPMENT SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 09 23 BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 25 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 23 21 16 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING SNEE 1149 MICROSCOPY LAB RENOVATION 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE CORNELL UNIVERSITY TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2